Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL
CNC Lathes
Equipped with theGE Fanuc 18T Control
TP1421
Revised: September 28, 1999
Manual No. M-320A Litho in U.S.A.Part No. M A-0009500-0320 April, 1997
- NOTICE -Damage resulting from misuse, negligence, or accident is not covered by theHardinge Machine Warranty.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
This manual covers the programming of Hardinge CONQUEST® T42series lathes equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T control and absoluteencoders.
In no event will Hardinge Inc. be responsible for indirect or consequen-tial damage resulting from the use or application of the information in thismanual.
Reproduction of this manual, in whole or in part, without writtenpermission of Hardinge Inc. is prohibited.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
- WARNINGS -Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of personal in-jury or damage to the machine, tooling, or workpiece.
- CAUTIONS -Cautions must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of damage to themachine, tooling, or workpiece.
- NOTES -Notes contain supplemental information.
Hardinge Inc.One Hardinge Drive
P.O. Box 1507Elmira, New York 14902-1507
Telephone: (607) 734-2281 FAX: (607) 734-8819www.hardinge.com
© 1997, Hardinge Inc. M-320A
READ COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING MACHINE
When this instruction book was printed, the information given was current. However, sincewe are constantly improving the design of our machine tools, it is possible that the illustrationsand descriptions may vary from the machine you received.
- WARNING -Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard Communica-tion Standard 1910.1200, effective September 23, 1987, and various state “em-ployee right-to-know laws” require that information regarding chemicals usedwith this equipment be supplied to you. A complete list of the chemicals usedwith this machine, their reference data sheet numbers, and their suppliersappears as an insertion at the end of this manual. Refer to the applicablesection of the Material Safety Data Sheets supplied with your machine whenhandling, storing, or disposing of chemicals.
Machine should only be used with a bar feed approved by Hardinge Inc.
HARDINGE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
Your Hardinge machine is designed and built for maximum ease and safety of operation.
However, some previously accepted shop practices may not reflect current safety regula-tions and procedures, and should be re-examined to insure compliance with the current safetyand health standards.
Hardinge Inc. recommends that all shop supervisors, maintenance personnel, and machinetool operators be advised of the importance of safe maintenance, setup, and operation of allequipment. Our recommendations are described below. READ THESE SAFETY RECOM-MENDATIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER.
READ THE APPROPRIATE MANUAL OR INSTRUCTIONS before attempting operation ormaintenance of the machine. Make sure you understand all instructions.
CONSULT YOUR SUPERVISOR when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.
DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT unless proper maintenance has been regularly performedand the equipment is known to be in good working order.
DON’T REMOVE any warning or instruction tags from machine.
DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibrationoccurs. Report any excessive or unusual vibration, sounds, smoke, or heat as well as anydamaged parts.
MAKE SURE equipment is properly grounded. Consult National Electric Code and all localcodes.
DISCONNECT MAIN ELECTRICAL POWER before attempting repair or maintenance.
DON’T REACH into any control or power case area unless electrical power if OFF.
DON’T TOUCH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT when hands are wet or when standing on awet surface.
M-320A i
ALLOW ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL to have access to enclosures containingelectrical equipment.
DON’T ALLOW the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.
REPLACE BLOWN FUSES with fuses of the same size and type as originally furnished.
ASCERTAIN AND CORRECT cause of a shutdown caused by overload heaters beforestarting machine.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND PROPER FOOT PROTECTION at all times. When nec-essary, wear respirator, helmet, gloves, and ear muffs or plugs.
KEEP AREA THE AROUND THE MACHINE well lighted and dry.
KEEP CHEMICAL AND FLAMMABLE MATERIAL away from electrical or operating equip-ment.
HAVE THE CORRECT TYPE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER handy when machining combus-tible material and keep chips clear of the work area.
DON’T USE a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.
MAKE SURE PROPER GUARDING is in place and all doors are closed and secured.
TO REMOVE OR REPLACE the collet closer it is necessary to remove the guard door atleft end of the machine. Make certain the guard door is replaced before starting the ma-chine.
DON’T ALTER THE MACHINE to bypass any interlock, overload, disconnect, or othersafety device.
DON’T OPEN GUARD DOORS while any machine component is in motion. Make certainthat all people in the area are clear of the machine when opening the guard door.
MAKE SURE chucks, closers, fixture plates, and all other spindle-mounted work-holdingdevices are properly mounted and secured before starting machine.
MAKE CERTAIN all tools are securely clamped in position before starting machine.
REMOVE ANY LOOSE PARTS OR TOOLS left on machine or in the work area beforeoperating machine. Always check machine and work area for loose tools and parts espe-cially after work has been done by maintenance personnel.
REMOVE CHUCK WRENCHES before starting the machine.
BEFORE PRESSING THE CYCLE START PUSH BUTTON, make certain that properfunctions are programmed and that all controls are set in the desired modes.
KNOW WHERE ALL stop push buttons are located in case of an emergency.
ii M-320A
CHECK THE LUBRICATION OIL LEVEL and the status of indicator lights before operatingthe machine.
MAKE CERTAIN that all guards are in good condition and are functioning properly beforeoperating the machine.
INSPECT ALL SAFETY DEVICES AND GUARDS to make certain that they are in goodcondition and are functioning properly before the cycle is started.
CHECK THE TURRET POSITION before pressing the Cycle Start push button.
CHECK SETUP, TOOLING AND SECURITY OF WORKPIECE if the machine has beenOFF for any length of time.
DRY CYCLE a new setup to check for programming errors.
MAKE CERTAIN you are clear of any “pinch point” created by moving slides before start-ing the machine.
DON’T OPERATE any equipment while any part of the body is in the proximity of apotentially hazardous area.
DON’T REMOVE CHIPS with hands. Use a hook or similar device and make certain thatall machine movements have ceased.
BE CAREFUL of sharp edges when handling newly machined workpieces.
DON’T REMOVE OR LOAD workpieces while any part of the machine is in motion.
DON’T OPERATE ANY MACHINE while wearing rings, watches, jewelry, loose clothing,neckties, or long hair not contained by a net or shop cap.
DON’T ADJUST tooling or coolant hoses while the machine is running.
DON’T LEAVE tools, workpieces or other loose items where they can come in contactwith a moving component of the machine.
DON’T CHECK finishes or dimensions of workpiece near running spindle or movingslides.
DON’T JOG SPINDLE in either direction when checking threads with a thread gage.
DON’T ATTEMPT to brake or slow the machine with hands or any makeshift device.
ANY ATTACHMENT, TOOL, OR MACHINE MODIFICATION not obtained from HardingeInc., must be reviewed by a qualified safety engineer before installation.
USE CAUTION around exposed mechanisms and tooling especially when setting up. Becareful of sharp edges on tools.
DON’T USE worn or defective hand tools. Use the proper size and type for job beingperformed.
M-320A iii
USE ONLY a soft-faced hammer on turret tools and fixtures.
DON’T USE worn or broken tooling on machine.
MAKE CERTAIN that all tool mounting surfaces are clean before mounting tools.
INSPECT ALL CHUCKING DEVICES daily to make sure they are in good operating con-dition.
REPLACE DEFECTIVE CHUCK before starting machine.
USE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE gripping pressure on the chuck. Consider weight, shapeand balance of workpiece.
USE LIGHTER THAN NORMAL feedrates and depth of cut when machining a workpiecediameter that is larger than the gripping diameter.
DON’T EXCEED the rated capacity of machine.
DON’T LEAVE the machine unattended while it is operating.
DON’T CLEAN the machine with an air hose.
DON’T OVERFILL tote pans.
KEEP TOTE PANS a safe distance from machine.
DON’T LET STOCK project past the back end of the collet closer or machine spindlewithout being adequately covered and properly supported.
FOLLOW each bar feed manufacturer’s guidelines. For performance and safe application,size and use feed tube bushings, pushers, and spindle liners according to bar feed infor-mation.
MAKE CERTAIN that any bar feed mechanism is properly aligned with spindle. If floor-mounted type, it must be securely bolted to floor.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, all operating and maintenance procedures are to be per-formed by one person. To avoid injury to yourself and others, be sure that all personnelare clear of the machine when opening or closing the coolant guard door and any accesscovers.
FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY
iv M-320A
- Contents -
CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGEIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Programming the GE Fanuc 18T Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Legal Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Special Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Tape Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Keyboard Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Decimal Point Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8O Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8N Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8G Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
G00 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9G01 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10G10 Offset Value Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G17 Work Plane Selection [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G18 Work Plane Selection [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G19 Work Plane Selection [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G20 Inch Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G21 Metric Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool . . . . . . . . 1-14G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool . . . . . . . . 1-14G50 Maximum RPM Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G65 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15G76 Automatic Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G80 Cancel Face Machining Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G84 Face Tapping Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
M-320A v
G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G96 Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel) . . . . . . . 1-17G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G101 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option] . . . . . . . . 1-18G102 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2 [Option] . . . . . . . . 1-18G103 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3 [Option] . . . . . . . . 1-18G107 Cylindrical Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G112 Polar Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
X Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19U Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21W Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Y Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23V Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24B Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24C Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24I Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25K Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
R Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Defining Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
P Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Q Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29S Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30M Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M00 Program Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31M01 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31M02 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31M03 Main Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31M04 Main Spindle Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31M05 Main Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M08 Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M09 Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M13 Main Spindle Forward/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32M14 Main Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
vi M-320A
M17 Headwall Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M18 Headwall Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M21 Open Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M22 Close Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M23 Activate Contouring Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M24 Cancel Contouring Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33M25 Part Catcher Retract [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Machines without End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Machines with End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M26 Part Catcher Extend [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Machines without End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34Machines with End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M28 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34M29 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34M30 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34M31 Program Rewind and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M38 Automatic Guard Door Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M39 Automatic Guard Door Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M43 Corner Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M44 Enable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35M45 Disable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36M56 Sub-Spindle Collet Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M57 Sub-Spindle Collet Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M60 Synchronization Code [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M69 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M70 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37M81 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M82 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2 [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M83 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3 [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M84 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M85 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M-320A vii
M86 Tailstock Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M88 Thermal Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M93 Steady Rest Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M94 Steady Rest Closed [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38M98 Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39M99 Subprogram End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Diameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
General Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Tool Orientation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Activating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Entering and Exiting the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . 2-5To Switch G41/G42 Code with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . 2-6Axis Reversals with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Modes in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not Performed . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Multiple Repetitive Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . 2-7Canned Turning and Facing Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . 2-7
G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Tool Moved away from the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . 2-8Tool Nose Radius Compensation Related Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Alarm 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Deactivating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Tool Nose Radius Compensation Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONFeedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Absolute and Incremental Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Insert Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Alarm Messages for Insert Chamfer/Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Sample Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Revised: September 28, 1999viii M-320A
CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETSWork Shift (Zero Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storing a Work Shift Offset from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Tooling (Main Turret) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Square Shank Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Qualified Tool Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Entering Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4To Store Tool Offsets from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Activating Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMHow the Control Positions the Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Rectangular Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Coordinate System Reference Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Axis Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Machine Zero Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Main Turret Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3End-Working Turret Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Sub-Spindle Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Machine Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Absolute Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLESCanned Turning Cycle (G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Example 1: G90 Straight Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Example 2: G90 Taper Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning (G71/G70) . . . . . . . . . . 6-3G71/G70 Standard Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
G71/G70 Pocket Turning [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Canned Facing Cycle (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Example 5: G94 Straight Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Example 6: G94 Taper Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing (G72/G70) . . . . . . . . . . 6-13G72 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Automatic G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17G73 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19G70 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21G74 Auto Drilling Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
M-320A ix
Variable Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Positioning the Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Calculating the Drill Pass Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25Optional Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
G75 Auto Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28P and Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Tool Movement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29G75 Auto Grooving Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLEIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Single Block Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
To Establish A Start Point For Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2G32 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Example 1: G32 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Example 2: G32 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
G92 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Example 3: G92 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Example 4: G92 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Plunge Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Compound Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Automatic Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Example 5: G76 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Example 6: G76 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13G76 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
P Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Q Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14R Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
G76 Execution Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15P Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Q Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15F Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15X Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Z Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16R Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
G76 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Left-Hand Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
x M-320A
CHAPTER 8 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMINGBlueprint Programming Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Angle Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Blueprint Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Example 1: Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Example 2: Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Example 3: Three Points with a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Example 4: Three Points with a Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Example 5: Four Points with Two Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Example 6: Four Points with Two Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Example 7: Four Points with One Radius and Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Example 8: Four Points with One Chamfer and Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Blueprint Programming Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Blueprint Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUSConstant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Manual Data Input Keyboard Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Tape or Floppy Disk Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Safe Start Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Hardinge Permanent Macro Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Macro 9112: Safe Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Macro 9136: Deep Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Tailstock Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Tailstock Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Tailstock Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
M84 - Tailstock Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7M85 - Tailstock Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7M86 - Tailstock Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Tailstock Programming Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7English/Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Establishing English/Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
M-320A xi
CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT [Option]General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Tool Life Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Number of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Amount of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Bar Feed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Determining Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3To Verify Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3To Set Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Determining the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5To Verify the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5To Switch the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Resetting a Tool Group Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7P Word - Tool Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8T Word - Turret Station and Offset Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Sample Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Data Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Combining Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands . . . . . . . 10-11
Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING [Option]Live Tooling M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Determining Rotational Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2B Word - Spindle Orient Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Determining Spindle Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Direction of Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Programming Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Live Tooling Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Deactivating Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Live Tooling Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Sample Live Tooling Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
xii M-320A
CHAPTER 12 - C AXIS PROGRAMMING [Option]Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1C Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Live Tooling Program Format with C Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Sample Live Tooling Program with C Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Live Tooling Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Polar Coordinate Interpolation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7Program Format for Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9Program Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Example 2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11Example 3 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Hexagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12Example 4 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13Example 5 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14Example 6 - Polar Interpolation - Radius Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Live Tooling Codes used for Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17Cylindrical Interpolation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolationused with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
C Axis Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
CHAPTER 13 - END-WORKING TURRET [Option]Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Tooling Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Tooling Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Valid Programming Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5G Word (Preparatory Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5M Word (Miscellaneous Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Index on the Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Y Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Programmable Work Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Activating a Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Sub-Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Executing a Sub-Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
G110 One-Shot Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Synchronization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
M-320A xiii
End-Working Turret Part Catcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9M25 (Part Catcher Retract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9M26 (Part Catcher Extend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Single Block Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Machining Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
G80 Cycle Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10G81 Single Pass Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10Machining Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
G83 Peck Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12Machining Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
G84 Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Machining Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18PMC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18CNC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
CHAPTER 14 - THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATIONIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Programming the Compensation Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Operator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Part Program Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Alarm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Enabling Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
CHAPTER 16 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option](Hydraulic Axis Drive)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Sub-Spindle G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Sub-Spindle M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M35 Sub-Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M56 Sub-Spindle Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M57 Sub-Spindle Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M69 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M70 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
xiv M-320A
M84 Sub-Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4M85 Sub-Spindle Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Sub-Spindle Work Shift Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5Programming Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
U/X Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6W/Z Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Tool Geometry Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Subprogram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Sub-Spindle Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10Running the Sub-Spindle Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10Sub-Spindle Sync with the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12Macro Program O9170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12Transferring from Main Spindle to Sub-spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Standard Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Standard Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
Transferring from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle(Using Standard Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
Sub-Spindle Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22Basic Sequence of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Sub-Spindle Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26Sub-Spindle Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
CHAPTER 16 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option](Ball Screw Axis Drive)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Programming Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
X/U Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Y/V Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Y Axis Position Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Z/W Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Sub-Spindle G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
M-320A xv
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Sub-Spindle M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M35 Sub-Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M56 Sub-Spindle Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M57 Sub-Spindle Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7M69 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7M70 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Part Catcher Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7Sub-Spindle Work Shift Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Tool Geometry Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Subprogram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Sub-Spindle Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12Running the Sub-Spindle Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12Sub-Spindle Sync with the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14Transferring From Main Spindle To Sub-spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14Collet Stock Stop Not Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14Collet Stock Stop Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17Transferring from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19Sub-Spindle Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Basic Sequence of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Sub-Spindle Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
xvi M-320A
APPENDIX ONETurret Travel Specifications
CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1CONQUEST T42-L Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2
Turret Top Plate Dimensions12 Station Top Plate (3/4" Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-312 Station Top Plate (20mm Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-410 Station Top Plate (3/4" Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-510 Station Top Plate (20mm Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-6
Tailstock Travel SpecificationsCONQUEST T42 and T42SP Super-Precision Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7CONQUEST T42-L Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7
Sub-Spindle Travel SpecificationsHydraulic Axis Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8Ball Screw Axis Drive (1.60 Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-9Ball Screw Axis Drive (0.46 Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-10
End-Working Turret Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-11Work Envelope
with 16C Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-12with 16C Master Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-13with 16C HQC®-42 Quick Change Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-14with 16C Thru-Hole Jaw Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-15with 20C Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-16with 20C Master Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-17with 20C HQC-42 Quick Change Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-18with 20C Thru-Hole Jaw Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-19
Spindle Torque / Horsepower CurvesMain Spindle - 10HP Standard Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-20Main Spindle - 10HP High Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-20Main Spindle - 15HP High Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-21Main Spindle - 15HP High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-21Sub-Spindle - 5HP Standard Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-22
APPENDIX TWOG Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1Standard M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-2Optional M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3PMC Generated Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-5PMC Generated Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
M-320A xvii
- NOTES -
xviii M-320A
CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE
INTRODUCTIONA part program is an ordered set of instructions which define slide and spindle motion as well
as auxiliary functions. These instructions are written in a part program language consisting of aseries of data blocks. Each data block contains adequate information for the machine tool toperform one or more machine functions.
A data block consists of one or more data words, which are treated together as a unit. Eachdata word consists of a word address followed by a numerical value. A word address is a letterwhich specifies the meaning of the data word.
The value of the number that follows the word address has a format which specifies thenumber of characters the word contains as well as the range these values must fall within.These formats are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tableson pages 1-2 and 1-3.
PROGRAMMING THE GE FANUC 18T CONTROLProgramming Hardinge CONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T
control requires an understanding of the machine, tooling, and control.
Extreme care must be exercised when writing a part program or punching a tape since allmachine movements will be executed as programmed. A miscalculation or selection of an incor-rect function can result in an incorrect motion.
The basic unit for part program input is the “Block”. Normally, one line or block of informationrepresents one describable operation or several describable operations that are independent ofeach other. (For example, axis movement and spindle speed changes are independent opera-tions which may be programmed in the same block.) A block may contain any or all of thefollowing:
1. Slash code (/)
2. Sequence number (N Function)
3. Preparatory Functions (G Functions)
4. Axis Movement Instructions (X or U, Y or V, and Z or W Functions)
5. Feedrate Command (F Function)
6. Spindle Speed Command (S Function)
7. Turret Station (T Function)
8. Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)
A block MUST contain a valid End of Block character.
M-320A 1-1
FUNCTION(Word)
PREPARATORYCOMMANDS
INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)
Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.
O (Prog. #)N (Block #)G (Command)M (Command)P (Block #)P (Dwell)Q (Block #)
-------
O4N4G3M2P4P8Q4
1100111
89999999
99999
999999999999
9999
O4N4G3M2P4P8Q4
1100111
89999999
99999
999999999999
9999
U (Coordinate)U (Dwell)V (Coordinate)9
W (Coordinate)X (Coordinate) 7
X (Coordinate) 8
X (Dwell)Y (Coordinate) 1
Y (Coordinate) 9
Y (Coordinate)10
Z (Coordinate)11
Z (Coordinate)12
G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01G00, G01G00, G01G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03
U±2.4U5.3
V±2.4W±2.4X±2.4X±2.4X5.3
Y±2.4Y±2.4Y±2.4Z±2.4Z±2.4
0.00010.0010.00010.00010.00010.00010.0010.00010.00010.00010.00010.0001
-99999.999
--
12.244012.6320
99999.99917.560017.080015.940014.150024.1500
U±3.3U5.3
V±3.3W±3.3X±3.3X±3.3X5.3
Y±3.3Y±3.3Y±3.3Z±3.3Z±3.3
0.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0010.001
-99999.999
--
311.000320.850
99999.999446.024433.830404.876359.410613.410
X (Tool Offset)X (Wear Offset)X (Zero Offset)Y (Tool Offset)Y (Wear Offset)Z (Tool Offset)Z (Wear Offset)Z (Zero Offset)
G10G10G10G10G10G10G10G10
X±2.4X±0.4X±2.4Y±2.4Y±0.4Z±2.4Z±0.4Z±2.4
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.
-0.5000--0.5000-0.5000-
X±3.3X±2.3X±3.3Y±3.3Y±2.3Z±3.3Z±2.3Z±3.3
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.
-12.700
--
12.700-
12.700-
I (Circ. Inter.)K (Circ. Inter.)K (Lead Change)
G02, G03G02, G03G34
I±3.4K±3.4K±1.6
0.0.0.000001
999.9999999.9999
9.999999
I±4.3K±4.3K±3.4
0.0.0.0001
9999.9999999.999
500.0000
F (per min) [X/U]11
F (per min) [X/U]12
F (per min) [Z/W]11
F (per min) [Z/W]12
F (per min) [Y/V]F (per rev)F (Thread Lead)
G98G98G98G98G98G99G32, G33, G34
F3.2F3.2F3.2F3.2F3.2F1.6F1.6
0.010.010.010.010.010.0000010.000001
472.00755.00630.00
1004.00394.00
9.9999999.999999
F5.0F5.0F5.0F5.0F5.0F3.4F3.4
1.1.1.1.1.
.001
.0001
12000.19200.16000.25500.10000.
500.0000500.0000
S (Spindle rpm) 2
S (Spindle rpm) 3
S (Spindle rpm) 4
S (Spindle rpm) 5
S (Live Tooling) 6
S (Surface Speed)
G50, G97G50, G97G50, G97G50, G97G97G96
S4S4S4S4S4S4
000001
500030004400600040009999
S4S4S4S4S4S4
000001
500030004400600040009999
B (Spin. Orient)C (C Axis)
--
B3C±5.3
00.
36099999.999
B3C±5.3
00.
36099999.99
T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232
A (Angle),C (Chamfer)R (Radius),R (Radius)
G00, G01G01G02, G03G01
A3.4,C2.4R2.4
,R2.4
0.00010.0001-0.0001
359.9999---
A3.4,C3.3R3.3
,R3.3
.001
.001-.001
359.9999---
Table 1.1 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments(CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L CNC Lathes)Reference :
1 - Lathes equipped with optional end-working turret.2 - Lathes equipped with the standard spindle drive.3 - Lathes equipped with the 10HP [7.5 KW] Hi-Torque spindle option.4 - Lathes equipped with the 15HP [11 KW] Hi-Torque spindle option or “Big Bore” 20C spindle option.5 - Lathes equipped with the Hi-Speed spindle option.6 - Lathes equipped with the Live Tooling option.
1-2 M-320A
FUNCTION(Word)
PREPARATORYCOMMANDS
INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)
Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.
O (Prog. #)N (Block #)G (Command)M (Command)P (Block #)P (Dwell)Q (Block #)
-------
O4N4G3M2P4P8Q4
1100111
89999999
99999
999999999999
9999
O4N4G3M2P4P8Q4
1100111
89999999
99999
999999999999
9999
U (Coordinate)U (Dwell)V (Coordinate)9
W (Coordinate)X (Coordinate) 7
X (Coordinate) 8
X (Dwell)Y (Coordinate) 1
Y (Coordinate) 9
Y (Coordinate)10
Z (Coordinate)11
G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G00, G01, G02, G03G04G00, G01G00, G01G00, G01G00, G01, G02, G03
U±2.5U4.4
V±2.4W±2.5X±2.5X±2.5X4.4
Y±2.4Y±2.4Y±2.4Z±2.5
0.000010.0010.00010.000010.000010.000010.0010.00010.00010.000010.00001
-9999.9999
--
12.2440012.63200
9999.999917.560017.080015.940014.15000
U±3.4U4.4
V±3.3W±3.4X±3.4X±3.4X4.4
Y±3.3Y±3.3Y±3.3Z±3.4
0.00010.0010.0010.00010.00010.00010.0010.0010.0010.0010.0001
-9999.9999
--
311.0000320.8500
9999.9999446.024433.830404.876359.4100
X (Tool Offset)X (Wear Offset)X (Zero Offset)Y (Tool Offset)Y (Wear Offset)Z (Tool Offset)Z (Wear Offset)Z (Zero Offset)
G10G10G10G10G10G10G10G10
X±2.5X±0.5X±2.5Y±2.4Y±0.4Z±2.5Z±0.5Z±2.5
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.
-0.50000--0.5000-0.50000-
X±3.4X±2.4X±3.4Y±3.3Y±2.3Z±3.4Z±2.4Z±3.4
0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.
-12.7000
--
12.700-
12.7000-
I (Circ. Inter.)K (Circ. Inter.)K (Lead Change)
G02, G03G02, G03G34
I±3.5K±3.5K±1.6
0.0.0.000001
999.99999999.99999
9.999999
I±4.4K±4.4K±3.4
0.0.0.0001
9999.99999999.9999
500.0000
F (per min) [X/U]11
F (per min) [Z/W]11
F (per min) [Y/V]F (per rev)F (Thread Lead)
G98G98G98G99G32, G33, G34
F3.2F3.2F3.2F1.6F1.6
0.010.010.010.0000010.000001
472.00630.00394.00
9.9999999.999999
F5.0F5.0F5.0F3.4F3.4
1.1.1.0.00010.0001
12000.16000.10000.
500.0000500.0000
S (Spindle rpm) 2
S (Spindle rpm) 5
S (Live Tooling) 6
S (Surface Speed)
G50, G97G50, G97G97G96
S4S4S4S4
0001
5000600040009999
S4S4S4S4
0001
5000600040009999
B (Spin. Orient)C (C Axis)
--
B3C±5.3
00.
36099999.999
B3C±5.3
00.
36099999.999
T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232
A (Angle),C (Chamfer)R (Radius),R (Radius)
G00, G01G01G02, G03G01
A3.4,C2.5R2.5
,R2.5
0.00010.00001-0.00001
359.9999---
A3.4,C3.4R3.4
,R3.4
.001
.0001-.0001
359.9999---
Table 1.2 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments(CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® CNC Lathes)
Reference :7 - Lathes NOT equipped with optional sub-spindle.8 - Lathes equipped with optional sub-spindle.9 - Lathes equipped with optional 1.60 inch offset ball screw driven sub-spindle.10 - Lathes equipped with optional 0.46 inch offset ball screw driven sub-spindle.11 - Relating to CONQUEST T42 and T42SP Lathes only.12 - Relating to CONQUEST T42-L Lathes only.
M-320A 1-3
LEGAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS
Legal alpha characters for the GE Fanuc 18T control are those used as word addresses in apart program block that the control will accept and act on. All illegal alpha characters inputthrough the RS-232 serial port will be loaded into memory, but will result in a decoding errorwhen program execution is attempted. The illegal character must be removed or replaced with alegal character. The following characters are illegal:
D, E, J, and L
SPECIAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS
An End of Record character should be the first and last character in a program which is to beuploaded to the machine control through the RS-232 serial port. If multiple programs are to beloaded from a single punched tape, punch the End of Record character after the last program onthe tape. The End of Record character will be followed by an End of Block character.
The End of Block character must be used after the last character in each data block of a partprogram that is to be loaded into the memory of the control. If the End of Block character isomitted from a part program data block, the control will consider the next block to be part of theblock missing the End of Block. This may cause undesirable machine behavior.
The End of Block character is a Carriage Return character in EIA (RS-224-B) format and aLine Feed character in ASCII (ISO) (RS-358-B) format. When programming from the keyboard,use the EOB key. This character will be displayed as a semicolon (;) on the control displayscreen.
Operator messages and comments can be included in a part program loaded from tape,provided they are enclosed in parentheses. Any legal ASCII character can be used when writinga comment.
The Block Skip (/) code inserted at the beginning of a data block will cause that block of datato be ignored by the control when “BLOCK SKIP” is activated by the machine operator. WhenBlock Skip is not active, the data block will be executed.
PROGRAMMING FORMAT
Programs to be executed by the GE Fanuc 18T control consist of alpha-numeric words thatthe control recognizes as specific commands. These words consist of one letter addresses andthe designated numbers for that address. Words within a block may follow any convenient se-quence. However, Hardinge recommends the following sequence:
/, N, G, X, Z, U, W, B, C, I, K, P, Q, R, A, F, S, T, M
The software for the system is configured to provide the following programming resolution:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes: .0001 inch [.001 mm]
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes: .00001 inch [.0001 mm]
This causes specific data word formats to be applied to the associated values. These formatsare outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables on pages 1-2and 1-3. These numbers indicate the maximum number of places allowed to the right and left ofthe decimal point.
A plus sign need not be entered since the control assumes plus if no sign is entered. A minussign MUST be programmed, if needed.
The general part program format is shown on page 1-40. The Safe Start Subprogram shownin the program format is described in Chapter 9 of this manual.
1-4 M-320A
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
Tape Programming Sequence:The sequence in which a tape should be programmed is as follows:
1. A few inches of tape feed (leader), as required.
2. Enter program ID code and program number. All programs are identified by the letter “O”in front of the part program ID number and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999).Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program IDcode and program number are followed by a valid End of Block character.
3. Enter the program.
4. End of Program command (M02, M30) in the last data block. All data blocks must endwith a valid End of Block character.
5. Enter an End of Record character.
6. A few inches of tape feed (trailer), as required.
Keyboard Programming Sequence:To program from the keyboard, follow this procedure:
1. Press the Edit push button.
2. Press the Program key.
3. Turn the Program Protect key switch to OFF.
- NOTE -Part programs are identified by the letter “O” in front of the part program ID numberand may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Program numbers 9000 through9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID code and program numberare followed by a valid End of Block character. An example of a program number is“O2222".
4. Key in the letter O and program number.
5. Press the Insert key.
6. Press the EOB key to enter an End of Block character.
7. Press the Insert key.
8. Enter each data block as follows:
a) Key in the letter addresses and values.b) Press the EOB key.c) Press the Insert key.
NOTEA valid End of Block character must be entered at the end of each data block.
9. The End of Program command (M02 or M30) must be placed at the end of the program,followed by a valid End of Block character.
10. Turn the Program Protect key switch to ON.
M-320A 1-5
PROGRAM NUMBER
Part programs stored in the control memory must be assigned a part program number. Theprogram numbers are used by the control to identify the various programs and subprogramswhich are stored in the control memory.
The program number MUST be identified by the letter “O” followed by the program identifica-tion number. It is not necessary to program the leading zeros as these are automatically insertedby the control, when needed. The program number must be on the first line of the program. Itmay be programmed on a line by itself or it may be the first entry in the first data block.
The part program numbers range from 1 to 8999. However, the following restrictions must beobserved when assigning program numbers:
1. Alpha and other miscellaneous characters (such as dashes) are not allowed.
2. Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for permanent macro programs en-tered on the Master Macro Tape. These numbers cannot be assigned to other partprograms or macros.
- NOTE -When entering a program from the keyboard, if the program identification number isomitted, the active part program will be edited according to the data entered whenthe Insert key is pressed. If one of the 9000 series permanent macro programs isactive and no program number is entered, the first program data block will berejected and the message “Write Protect” will be displayed on the control displayscreen.
When a tape which does not contain a program identification number is loaded into memory,the control will automatically assign the first programmed sequence number as the programnumber.
Any attempt to store programs having numbers already stored in program memory will causethe message “Already Exists” to be displayed on the control display screen. This message indi-cates that the program identification number has already been assigned.
X AND Z AXES
The axis of motion parallel to the spindle face is the X axis and the axis of motion parallel tothe spindle centerline is the Z axis. From this point on, the cross slide will be referred to as the Xaxis and the carriage as the Z axis. These letter designations for the two axes are recommendedby the Electronic Industries Association (E.I.A.). In an effort to promote interchangeability andprevent misunderstandings between CNC manufacturers and purchasers, recommended stand-ards have been set forth by E.I.A. These standards include the following: axis designation, axismotion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operational command format, dataformat, and electrical interface between controls and machine tools.
1-6 M-320A
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
A decimal point should be used with the following address words: A, C, F, I, K, R, U, W, X,and Z. If a decimal point is programmed in a word in which a decimal point is not allowed (P, Q,or B word) or if two or more decimal points appear in any one data word, an error message willbe displayed.
Values with or without decimal points may be commanded in the same data block.
Trailing zeros need not be programmed when using decimal point programming.
If no decimal point is programmed, the control uses the appropriate data word format to insertleading zeros and properly position the decimal point.
Example: In Inch mode on the CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe, the format forthe Z word is ±2.5 . If Z4. is programmed, the control will assume Z4.00000 .
- CAUTION -The programmer must make certain all decimal points are correctly positionedto prevent undesirable machine behavior.
This assumed decimal point is an important concept to keep in mind. There can be a greatdeal of difference between values with and without decimal points.
Example: The command “X2.” sends the cross slide to coordinate X2.00000; however, thecommand “X2" (no decimal point) sends the cross slide to X.00002 . Be sure thedecimal point is programmed when allowed.
Besides specifying the location of the assumed decimal point, the word address format alsoindicates the maximum number of digits which can appear to the left and right of the decimalpoint.
M-320A 1-7
DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONSOn the following pages are descriptions of the data words used with the GE Fanuc 18T
control.
O WORD
The O word is used as the letter address for part program numbers and must precede thepart program identification number. Refer to “Program Number”, on page 1-6.
N WORD
The N word provides a sequence number consisting of the letter “N” and up to four digits(0000 - 9999). It is not required to have a sequence number in any block. When used, they maybe placed anywhere in the block; however, it is customary to program them as the first word inthe block, except when a Block Delete (/) is programmed. Block Delete codes, when pro-grammed, will be the first character in a block.
The N word does not affect machine operation. However, it does give operators a valuablereference should they wish to relate an operation being performed to the program manuscript.
The numbering sequence can begin with any number, such as N0001. It is recommended thatthe programmer assign sequence numbers in intervals of five or ten so that additional blocks canbe inserted into the program if necessary. This eliminates the necessity of reassigning sequencenumbers after blocks are added to the program. The only exception to this recommendation isthat the block starting each operation be assigned the number of the turret station to be used forthat operation. For example, when using turret station #6, N6 will be the block number to startthe operation.
Leading zeros may be omitted.
G WORD
The G word is a preparatory command which sets up the control for a specific type of opera-tion. It has the word format G3, with a range of 00 to 999. Certain G codes are default codesand are automatically activated by the control under the following conditions:
1. Machine Power-up
2. Reading an End of Program Code (M02/M30)
3. Control Reset
4. Emergency Stop
The G codes are of two types:
1. Non-modal G codes are effective only in the block in which they are programmed.
2. Modal G codes remain effective until replaced by another G code in the same group.
The chart in Appendix 2 lists the G codes that are used with the GE Fanuc 18T control bygroups.
Only one G code from each group is permitted in a data block. If more than one G code froma group is programmed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the last of the conflicting Gcodes entered in the data block will be the active G code.
G codes containing a leading zero may be programmed without the zero.
Example: G01 may be programmed as G1
1-8 M-320A
G00 Positioning(Group 1 G Code)
This positioning command generates linear motion on one or more axes (X, Y, or Z) from thecurrent position to the programmed end points at a rate determined by the Rapid Overrideswitch. When this switch is set to 100%, axis motion takes place at the rapid traverse ratesshown below. Rapid traverse rates are shown as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 & T42SP LathesX Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Y Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Z Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP LathesZ Axis: 1004 [255000] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Axis distance may be expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W forincremental moves.
A programmed feedrate (F Function) in a G00 block is ignored by the control.
When the turret is programmed to move in both axes (X & Z), the axes execute a vectorialmove at a traverse rate which is a result of the X and Z rapid traverse. When a G00 positioningmove is programmed and the Rapid Override switch is set to 100%, both axes will move atmaximum traverse.
The G00 command is modal. A programmed G00 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G00 command.
G01 Linear Interpolation(Group 1 G Code)
Linear Interpolation generates linear motion on one or more axes (X, Y, or Z) from the currentposition to the programmed end points at a rate specified by a feedrate command in the sameblock or by an active feedrate from a preceding block. The programmed feedrate is directlyaffected by the Feedrate Override switches.
The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Programmable feedrates are shownas inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP LathesX Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Y Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Z Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP LathesZ Axis: 1004 [255000] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Axis distance may be expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W forincremental moves. When both the X and Z axes are programmed for a taper cut, the control willcompensate X and Z axis feedrates to produce a vectorial velocity equal to the programmedfeedrate. That is, when both axes are programmed, a vectorial move is generated.
The G01 command is modal. A programmed G01 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G01 command.
M-320A 1-9
G02 Clockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)
Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a clockwise arc.
The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when lookingdownward at the plan view of the workpiece.
The G02 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) toprovide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.
The G02 command is modal. A programmed G02 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G02 command.
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc(Group 1 G Code)
Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a counter-clockwise arc.
The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when lookingdownward at the plan view of the workpiece.
The G03 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) toprovide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.
The G03 command is modal. A programmed G03 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G03 command.
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
G04 Dwell(Group 0 G Code)
A dwell command must be programmed with a X, U, or P word to specify the duration of thedwell in seconds. The range of dwell is as follows:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes: .001 to 99999.999 seconds.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes: .0001 to 9999.9999 seconds.
The G04 Preparatory Command and its associated X, U, or P word must be programmedtogether in a data block that does not generate axis motion.
- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when the P word is used to specify thedwell period. The P word specifies dwell in milliseconds. Leading zero suppressionformat must be used.
DWELL IN SECONDS:
A dwell of 2.5 seconds may be programmed in any of the following ways:
G04 X2.5G04 U2.5G04 P2500
The dwell code is non-modal and does not change the status of any modal condition of thecontrol. Following the dwell, the operating mode reverts to the same status as before the dwell.The previous feedrate is reinstated.
1-10 M-320A
G10 Offset Value Setting(Group 0 G Code)
The G10 command permits entering the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets with the partprogram or as a separate program instead of entering the offset(s) individually from the ManualData Input keyboard.
When offsets are entered as a separate program, this program must be executed prior to partprogram execution to insert the offset values into the offset registers.
As many offsets as needed may be entered from a separate tape. The G10 preparatorycommand is non-modal and must be programmed in each offset entry block.
Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”.
G17 Work Plane Selection [Option](Group 16 G Code)
The G17 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,C plane as the activework plane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.
G18 Work Plane Selection [Option](Group 16 G Code)
The G18 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,Z plane as the activework plane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.
G19 Work Plane Selection [Option](Group 16 G Code)
The G19 command is used during C axis programming to select the Z,C plane as the activework plane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.
G20 Inch Data Input(Group 6 G Code)
Inch mode allows the programmer to program in inch units. The command is modal and canbe canceled only by a G21 (metric mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect onG20. If G20 is active when power is turned OFF, it will be active when power is restored. G20must be programmed in a block by itself.
- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with inch dimensions have the G20code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in metric mode.
G21 Metric Data Input(Group 6 G Code)Metric mode allows the programmer to program in metric units. The command is modal and
can be canceled only by a G20 (inch mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect onG21. If G21 is active when power is turned OFF, It will be active when power is restored. G21must be programmed in a block by itself.
- NOTE -It is recommended that all programs written with metric dimensions have the G21code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in casethe previously executed program was in inch mode.
M-320A 1-11
G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option](Group 9 G Code)
With G22 active, stored stroke limit #2 is active. The tool cannot enter the stroke limits estab-lished by these stored stroke limits.
- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G22 is inactive.
G22 is active at power-up regardless of whether it was active when the power was turnedOFF. However, a control reset will not return the control to G22 if G23 is active when the controlreset is performed.
G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option](Group 9 G Code)
With G23 active, stored stroke limit #2 is inactive. The tool is free to move within the rectangu-lar areas established by these limits.
- NOTE -Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G23 is active.
G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead)(Group 1 G Code)
The G32 threadcutting command is used when the programmer wishes to maintain completecontrol over the depth of each cutting pass.
Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread isdetermined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requiresprogramming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to beprogrammed.
The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distancebetween each thread. The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes F1.6 F3.4
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes F1.6 F3.4
Example: The command “G32 W-6. F.05" will result in a linear thread cutting pass 6 incheslong with a .05 inch lead.
The Feedrate Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to 0%.Setting the Feedrate Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axismotion. The Feedrate Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stoppush button and Reset key are active during the threading pass.
The G32 command is modal. A programmed G32 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G32 command.
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.
1-12 M-320A
G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option](Group 1 G Code)
The G34 variable lead threadcutting command is used if thread lead is to increase or de-crease.
Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread isdetermined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requiresprogramming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to beprogrammed.
The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distancebetween each thread.
The K word specifies the rate per revolution at which the lead increases or decreases. Apositive (+) K causes an increasing lead and a negative (-) K causes a decreasing lead.
The data word formats are shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L LatheF1.6 F3.4
K±1.6 K±3.4
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® LatheF1.6 F3.4
K±1.6 K±3.4
The Feedrate Override switches are not effective during the threading pass unless set to 0%.Setting the Feedrate 1 Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axismotion. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stoppush button and Reset key are active during the threading pass.
The G34 command is modal. A programmed G34 command will cancel any currently activeGroup 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G34 command.
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.
G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose radius compensation (G41/G42) is canceled by a programmed G40. If G40 isprogrammed in a block by itself, tool compensation is canceled. If the G40 block contains anaxis move, tool compensation is canceled; then, the programmed move occurs without compen-sation. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be canceled when the Emergency Stop push buttonor the Reset key is pressed.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.
M-320A 1-13
G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool is established byprogramming G41. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the toolmotion. If the workpiece is to the right of the operator, the correct code is G41. G41 may beprogrammed with or without position data in the same data block.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.
G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool is established byprogramming G42. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the toolmotion. If the workpiece is to the left of the operator, the correct code is G42. G42 may beprogrammed with or without position data in the same data block.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.
G50 Maximum RPM Limit(Group 0 G Code)The G50 command is used with Constant Surface Speed to establish a spindle rpm limit. The
following example establishes a spindle speed limit of 4000 rpm.
Example: G50 S4000;
A Control OFF cancels a G50 rpm limit.
Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on Constant Surface Speed.
G65 Macro Call(Group 0 G Code)
To activate a particular macro and have it executed from the current slide position, programthe following macro call command:
G65 P_____ ;
Where: G65 = Macro Call Command
P = Macro Program Number
The G65 command is non-modal. After the G65 command block is executed, G65 mode isdeactivated.
Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on the G65 Macro Call command.
G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)
The G70 command is used in conjunction with canned roughing cycles G71, G72, or G73 tospecify the section of the workpiece to be finish contoured. The G70 data block specifies the firstand last block in the part program controlling the section to be finish contoured. Refer to thefollowing sections for additional information:
G71/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning, Chapter 6
G72/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing, Chapter 6
G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat, Chapter 6
1-14 M-320A
G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle(Group 0 G Code)
The G71 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing of a workpiece with multiple turning passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G71 blocks specify the amount of stock to beremoved on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the firstand last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle(Group 0 G Code)
The G72 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing of a workpiece with multiple facing passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G72 blocks specify the amount of stock to beremoved on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the firstand last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle(Group 0 G Code)
The G73 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-ing repeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour). This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G73 blocks specify the incremental distance be-tween the first and last roughing pass, the number of roughing passes, and the first and lastblock in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)(Group 0 G Code)
The G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments.In the G74 block, the programmer specifies the hole depth, size of depth increment, and drillingfeedrate. The G74 command is non-modal, it is effective only in the block in which it is pro-grammed.
Refer to “Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle (G74)”, in Chapter 6, for additionalinformation.
G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle(Group 0 G Code)The G75 command activates an automatic grooving cycle that uses constant depth incre-
ments. All information for the G75 Auto grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks. TheG75 command is non-modal; it is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
Refer to “G75 Auto Grooving Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
M-320A 1-15
G76 Automati c Threadin g Cycle(Grou p 0 G Code)
The G76 Automatic Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to programmultiple threading passes with two blocks of information instead of programming four blocks perthreading pass. The G76 command is non-modal and is canceled when the threading cycle iscompleted. Straight and tapered threads using plunge or compound infeed can be programmed.
The Feedrate 1 override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to0%. Setting the Feedrate 1 override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axismotion. The Feedrate 1 override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stoppush button and Reset key are active during the threading pass.
The Feed Hold push button is not active during the threading pass.
Refer to “Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76)”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.
G80 Cancel Face Machinin g CycleThe G80 command is used to cancel the following cycles:
G81 Single Pass Face Drilling CycleG83 Peck Face Drilling CycleG84 Face Tapping Cycle
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G80 command.
G81 Singl e Pass Face Drillin g CycleThe G81 drilling cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform single
pass drilling operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle.
G83 Peck Face Drillin g CycleThe G83 drilling cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform peck
drilling operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle.
G84 Face Tappin g CycleThe G84 tapping cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform tapping
operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G84 Face Tapping Cycle.
G90 Canned Turnin g Cycle(Grou p 1 G Code)
The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G90 block.Straight or tapered turn operations may be performed. The G90 command is modal. A pro-grammed G90 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 Gcode will cancel an active G90 command. G90 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset.The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Feed Holdpush button are active.
Refer to “Canned Turning Cycle (G90)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
1-16 M-320A
G92 Canned Threading Cycle(Group 1 G Code)
The G92 Canned Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to programmultiple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G92block. Straight or tapered threads may be cut in this mode. Compound infeeding is not possiblein this mode. The G92 command is modal. A programmed G92 command will cancel any cur-rently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G92 command.G92 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset. The Feed Hold push button is not activeduring the threading pass, but is active during the return pass.
The Feedrate 1 override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to0%. Setting the Feedrate 1 override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axismotion. The Feedrate 1 override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stoppush button and Reset key are active during the threading pass.
Refer to “G92 Programming”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.
G94 Canned Facing Cycle(Group 1 G Code)
The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G94 block.Straight or tapered facing operations may be performed. The G94 command is modal. A pro-grammed G94 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 Gcode will cancel an active G94 command. G94 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset.The Feedrate Override switch and Feed Hold push button are active.
Refer to “Canned Facing Cycle (G94)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G96 Constant Surface Speed(Group 2 G Code)
The G96 mode allows programming the speed of the workpiece with respect to the tool pointdirectly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metricmode (G21). Constant Surface Speed is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-grammed constant surface speed (S word). The control automatically adjusts the spindle speedwithin its range to maintain the constant surface speed as the cutting radius varies. Refer to“G50 Spindle Limitation” for limiting spindle rpm while using G96 programming. G96 is canceledby G97. If a new spindle speed is not programmed, the spindle will remain at the speed that wasactive when Constant Surface Speed was canceled.
Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 9, for more information.
G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel)(Group 2 G Code)
G97 allows the programmer to program spindle speeds directly in revolutions per minute.When G97 cancels G96, the spindle speed in rpm equals the speed at which the spindle wasturning when Constant Surface Speed was canceled. If a different spindle speed is desired, an Sword specifying the new spindle speed should be programmed in the same block as the G97command. The S word format for direct rpm programming is S4.0
M-320A 1-17
G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)
The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm per minute. The feedrate remainsunchanged until reprogrammed. The F word format is F3.2 in inch mode (G20) and F5.0 inmetric mode (G21). When entering G98 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G98 ismodal and cancels G99. The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples arewritten for inch mode (G20):
Example 1: F400 results in a feedrate of 4.00 inches per minute.
Example 2: F400. results in a feedrate of 400.00 inches per minute.
G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate(Group 5 G Code)
This is the power-up or reset state. The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly ininches/mm per revolution. The feedrate remains unchanged until reprogrammed. The F wordformat is F1.6 in inch mode (G20) and F3.4 in metric mode (G21). The maximum programmablefeedrates are 9.999999 inches/revolution and 500.0000 millimeters/revolution. When enteringG99 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G99 is modal and cancels G98.
G100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option]The G100 command is used to indicate the end of an end-working turret sub-routine, which is
embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G101 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]The G101 command is used to indicate the beginning of end-working turret sub-routine #1,
which is embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G102 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2 [Option]The G102 command is used to indicate the beginning of end-working turret sub-routine #2,
which is embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G103 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3 [Option]The G103 command is used to indicate the beginning of end-working turret sub-routine #3,
which is embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G107 Cylindrical Interpolation [Option]The G107 command activates cylindrical interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chap-
ter 12 for additional information.
G112 Polar Interpolation [Option]The G112 command activates polar interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12
for additional information.
G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option]The G113 command cancels polar interpolation. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional informa-
tion.
1-18 M-320A
X WORD
- CAUTION -Programming an X axis move without the correct Tool or Zero Offset active couldcause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tailstock, orworkpiece.
The X word is a DIAMETER DIMENSION for the cross slide. It is measured relative to thespindle centerline and is written with an X followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign maybe omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed. The X commandestablishes the absolute position of the turret top plate reference location in relation to the spin-dle centerline after movement has been completed.
- NOTE -Lathes equipped with 10 station or 12 station turret top plates have the same turrettravel specifications. Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.
Only one X command is permitted in a data block. If more than one X command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the X commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe X±2.4 X±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe X±2.5 X±3.4
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, X is positive when the turret reference point is programmedto move to a position behind the spindle centerline. X is negative when the turret reference pointis programmed to move to a position in front of the spindle centerline. X axis programmingresolution is discussed under “Diameter Programming”, page 1-39.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed motions will bethe final position of the turret reference point in relation to the spindle centerline. The position willbe displayed as a diameter whose center is on the spindle centerline. When X axis tool offsetsare activated by an offset command (T word), the programmed position will be modified accord-ing to the offset.
Example: A command of X2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide with theturret reference point 1.25 inches behind the spindle centerline.
A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 doesnot coincide with the spindle centerline. If X0 for the work coordinate system used is not on thespindle centerline, all programmed motions will be relative to the X0 established by the workshift. A movement in the +X direction will cause the X axis to be positioned one-half the pro-grammed distance behind the zero point. A movement in the -X direction will cause the X axis tobe positioned one-half the programmed distance in front of the zero point. Refer to Chapter 4 forinformation regarding the work shift.
The X word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The X word formatin a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
M-320A 1-19
U WORD
- CAUTION -Programming a U axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tail-stock, or workpiece.
The U command establishes the incremental move of the cross slide position in relation to thecurrent cross slide location.
Only one U command is permitted in a data block. If more than one U command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the U commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe U±2.4 U±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe U±2.5 U±3.4
U is positive when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the back of the machine. Uis negative when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the front of the machine.
Example: A command of U2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide 1.25 inchesin the +X direction from the previous position on the X axis.
The U word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The U word formatin a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
1-20 M-320A
Z WORD
- CAUTION -Programming a Z axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tail-stock, or workpiece.
The Z word is a distance command for the upper carriage. It is measured relative to the mainspindle face and is written with a Z followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus sign maybe omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.
- NOTE -Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.
Only one Z command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Z command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the Z commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe Z±2.4 Z±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Z±2.5 Z±3.4
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Z is positive when the turret reference point is programmedto the right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Z is negative when the turret refer-ence point is programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Z axis move-ments will be the final position of the turret face in relation to the main spindle face. Since allupper carriage movement must take place to the right of the headstock, all movements regard-less of direction will be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active, the pro-grammed position will be modified accordingly.
Example: A command of “Z5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the uppercarriage with the turret face 5 inches from the main spindle face. A command of“Z9.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the upper carriage with theturret face 9 inches from the main spindle face.
A work shift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 does notcoincide with the main spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the mainspindle face, all programmed Z axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by the workshift. A positive Z value describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negative Zvalue describes a coordinate point to the left of the Z0 point.
M-320A 1-21
W WORD
- CAUTION -Programming a W axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tail-stock, or workpiece.
The W command establishes the incremental move of the upper carriage in relation to thecurrent carriage location.
Only one W command is permitted in a data block. If more than one W command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the W commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe W±2.4 W±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe W±2.5 W±3.4
W is positive when the upper carriage is programmed to move away from the spindle face. Wis negative when the upper carriage is programmed to move toward the spindle face.
Example: A command of “W5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the uppercarriage 5 inches in the +Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis. Acommand of “W-5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the uppercarriage 5 inches in the -Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis.
1-22 M-320A
Y WORD
- CAUTION -Programming a Y axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the workpiece.
The Y word is a distance command for the lower carriage on machines equipped with anend-working turret or a ball screw driven sub-spindle. The Y coordinate is measured relative tothe main spindle face and is written with a Y followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plussign may be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.
- NOTE -The ball screw driven sub-spindle is available in two configurations, which differonly in travel specifications. Be sure to refer to the appropriate specifications for themachine to be programmed.
Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications for the end-working turret or ball screw drivensub-spindle.
Only one Y command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Y command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the Y commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 Lathe Y±2.4 Y±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Y±2.4 Y±3.3
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Y is positive when the reference point of the lower axis isprogrammed to the right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Y is negative when thereference point of the lower axis is programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordi-nate System.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Y axis move-ments will be the final position of the lower axis reference point in relation to the main spindleface. Since all lower axis movement must take place to the right of the headstock, all move-ments regardless of direction will be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active,the programmed position will be modified accordingly.
Example: A command of “Y5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lowercarriage with the reference point 5 inches from the main spindle face. A com-mand of “Y9.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lower carriagewith the reference point 9 inches from the main spindle face.
A work shift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 does notcoincide with the main spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the mainspindle face, all programmed Y axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by thework shift. A positive Y value describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negativeY value describes a coordinate point to the left of the Z0 point.
M-320A 1-23
V WORD
- CAUTION -Programming a V axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset activecould cause the tool to strike the workpiece.
The V command establishes the incremental move of the lower carriage on machinesequipped with a ball screw driven sub-spindle. This incremental move is in relation to the currentcarriage location.
Only one V command is permitted in a data block. If more than one V command is pro-grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the V commandprogrammed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 Lathe V±2.4 V±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe V±2.4 V±3.3
V is positive when the lower carriage is programmed to move away from the main spindleface. V is negative when the lower carriage is programmed to move toward the main spindleface.
Example: A command of “V5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lowercarriage 5 inches in the +Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis. Acommand of “V-5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lowercarriage 5 inches in the -Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis.
B WORD
The B word is a spindle orient command. The spindle is stopped in relation to the spindle 0(zero) degree mark. For more information, refer to Chapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
C WORD
The C word is an absolute C axis command. The C axis option provides the programmer withthe following machining capabilities:
- Live Tooling with Spindle Orient- Polar Coordinate Interpolation (face milling)- Cylindrical Interpolation (contoured milling on the O.D.)
For more information, refer to Chapter 12, “C Axis Programming”.
1-24 M-320A
I WORD
The I word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The I word is a signed valuedefining the distance on the X axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is aresult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode(G20)
Metric Mode(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe I±3.4 I±4.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe I±3.5 I±4.4
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
K WORD
The K word is used during Circular Interpolation and Variable Lead Threadcutting.
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)The K word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The K word is a signed value
defining the distance on the Z axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is aresult of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe K±3.4 K±4.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe K±3.5 K±4.4
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
(Continued on next page)
M-320A 1-25
Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option]The K word specifies the change in thread lead per spindle revolution. The value is positive
for an increasing lead and negative for a decreasing lead.
The word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe K±1.5 K±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe K±1.6 K±3.4
Refer to “Variable Lead Threadcutting”, in Chapter 7.
R WORD
Linear Interpolation (G01)When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,R” defines the numerical values of a corner radius
between any linear (G01) moves. The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe ,R2.4 ,R3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe ,R2.5 ,R3.4
Refer to “Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius”, in Chapter 3.
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)When Circular Interpolation (G02 or G03) is active, R defines the numerical value of a radius
connecting two points. The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe R2.4 R3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe R2.5 R3.4
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
(Continued on next page)
1-26 M-320A
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42)When Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is active, R defines the numerical value
of the tool nose radius. Values are stored in the Tool Offset Tables and are activated by a Tcommand. The data word format is shown in the following table:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe R1.4 R2.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe R1.5 R2.4
Refer to “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”, in Chapter 2.
Defining TapersWhen used with the following cycles, the R word defines the amount of taper when a tapered
turning, threading, or facing cycle is executed:
Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76), Chapter 7Canned Turning Cycle (G90), Chapter 6G92 Programming, Chapter 7Canned Facing Cycle (G94), Chapter 6
M-320A 1-27
P WORD
The P word is used in the following functions:
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6Subprogram Calling, Chapter 9Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4
The P word may also be used to establish a time factor for a G04 Dwell. The P word has thedata word format P8 when used to specify dwell. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the P word specifies the sequence number ofthe first block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.When used with the G70 cycle, the P word specifies the sequence number of the first block inthe program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data wordformat is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
- NOTE -Decimal Point programming cannot be used with the P word. Leading zero sup-pression must be used.
When used with subprogram calling, the P word appears in the M98 calling block of the mainpart program and specifies the program I.D. number of the subprogram to be called. The dataword format is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
When used with tape entry of tool offsets or work shift offsets, the P word specifies the offsetnumber and has the following numerical ranges:
P00 when used with Work shift OffsetP01 to P32 when used with tool wear offsetsP10001 to P10032 when used with tool geometry offsets
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool offsets in memory.
Q WORD
The Q word is used in the following functions:
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4
When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the Q word specifies the Sequence Numberof the last block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.When used with the G70 cycle, the Q word specifies the sequence number of the last block inthe program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data wordformat is Q4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
When tool geometry offsets are entered by tape, the Q word specifies the tool tip orientationnumber. The data word format is Q1, with numerical values ranging from 0 to 9. Refer to “ToolOffsets”, in Chapter 4.
1-28 M-320A
F WORD
The F word is used to establish a feedrate. When used with the G98 command, it expressesthe feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. The word format is F3.2 for inch mode (G20)and F5.0 for metric mode (G21). The decimal point must be programmed.
When used with the G99 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters perrevolution. The word format is F1.6 for inch mode (G20) and F3.4 for metric mode (G21). Thedecimal point must be programmed. If more than one feedrate is programmed in a data block,the last feedrate programmed will be the active feedrate.
Due to the maximum feedrates on the X, Y, and Z axes, the feedrate in G99 mode is “LeadLimited”. When G99 mode is active, the maximum feedrate in G01 mode is derived from thefollowing formulas:
Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ rev/minMaximum Feedrate (mm/min) = mm per minute ÷ rev/min
The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Feedrates are shown as inches perminute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 & T42SP LathesX Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Y Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Z Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP LathesZ Axis: 1004 [255000] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
The F word, which can be placed anywhere in the data block, remains unchanged until repro-grammed. If G00 is used to obtain the rapid traverse rate, be sure it is canceled by anotherGroup 1 G code after the rapid traverse move is completed.
The Feedrate Override switches modify the programmed feedrate from 0% (Feed Hold) to150%. When Dry Run mode is active, the control causes all slide motion to take place at afeedrate selected with the Feedrate Override switches.
S WORD
The S word has several functions, depending on the G code it is associated with:
CODE FUNCTION:
G50 S word selects the spindle rpm limit for Constant Surface SpeedG96 S word specifies surface feet/meters per minute in Constant Surface SpeedG97 S word selects direct spindle rpm
When used with G50, the S word specifies the maximum rpm the spindle can attain duringConstant Surface Speed programming (G96).
In G96 Constant Surface Speed programming, the format is S4 in both inch and metricmodes. The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minutein metric mode (G21). Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 9.
When used in G97 direct rpm mode, the word format is S4. Maximum spindle speeds arelisted in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-3. The S word is modal, and once programmed, need notbe programmed again until a different spindle speed is required.
Do not program a decimal point with the S word.
M-320A 1-29
T WORD
The T word selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activatesthe Tool Offset number. The Tool Offset number selects the following:
Tool Geometry Offset File:
1. X and Z axis Tool Dimensions.
2. Tool Nose Radius Value.
3. Tool Orientation Number.
Tool Wear Offset File:
1. X and Z axis Tool Wear adjustments.
The T word has the word format T4. The first two digits specify the turret station and the lasttwo digits specify the location of the tool offsets. Note that both the geometry and wear offsetsare activated by the last two digits.
Example: N0120 G04 T0515;
Block N0120 calls for turret station 5. Tool geometry offsets on line 15 of the Tool OffsetGeometry File will be activated and tool wear offsets on line 15 of the Tool Wear File will also beactivated.
- CAUTION -If no tool offsets are to be activated, the last two digits MUST be 00. If no digitsare programmed in the last two places, the turret will not index. Instead, the con-trol will use the turret station number as an offset and activate that offset. Thiscould result in a collision as the control will attempt to position the previouslyactive tool using incorrect offsets or no offsets at all.
For example, if the turret is to be indexed to station 5 without an offset, T0500 must beprogrammed. If T05 is programmed, the turret will not be indexed to station 5, but offset 05 willbe activated.
A turret command of “T0" should be inserted before indexing to a new turret station and at theend of each operation to cause the active tool offsets to be cleared from the offset registers.
- NOTE -When the Hardinge Safe-Start formats are used, it is not necessary to program“T0" before indexing to a new turret station. ”T0" is included in the Safe-Start sub-programs. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on Safe Start subprograms.
1-30 M-320A
M WORD
The M words convey action to the machine. They are known as miscellaneous functions andare designated by a programmed M word having the format M2.
Only one M code is allowed in a data block. If more than one M code is programmed in ablock from the keyboard or tape, the last M code entered will be the active M code. Refer also tothe M code chart in Appendix 2.
The M code may be placed anywhere in the data block.
The following M codes have been assigned to Hardinge CONQUEST® T42 series lathesequipped with the GE Fanuc 18T control:
M00 Program StopThe M00 command stops the program, stops the spindle, and turns the coolant off. The Collet
Open/Close push button is enabled. This function can be used for gauging and end-for-endingthe workpiece. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to continue. It is the programmer’sresponsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51, M52, M53, or M54 to restart thespindle or live tooling (option) and/or coolant pump when restarting the program after an M00Program Stop.
M01 Optional StopThe M01 command performs the same function as M00, if the Optional Stop push button on
the control panel has been activated before the block containing the M01 is read by the control.If the Optional Stop push button has not been activated by the operator, the control will ignorethe programmed M01 and will continue to execute the program. This function is useful when it isnecessary to gauge the workpiece during setup. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program tocontinue. It is the programmer’s responsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51,M52, M53, or M54 to restart the spindle or live tooling (option) and/or coolant pump when restart-ing the program after an M01 Optional Stop.
M02 End of ProgramM02 indicates the end of a part program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It
stops the spindle and turns the coolant off. The Collet Open/Close push button is enabled. Referalso to M30.
M03 Main Spindle ForwardThe M03 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwiseas viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M03 remains active until canceled by M00,M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.
M04 Main Spindle ReverseThe M04 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M04 remains active until canceledby M00, M01, M02, M03, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stoppush button.
M-320A 1-31
M05 Main Spindle Stop/Coolant OFFThe M05 command causes the spindle to stop and turns the coolant off, but DOES NOT stop
axis motion unless G99 is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, or M14.M05 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, Reset,and Emergency Stop.
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle [Option]M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the the sub-spindle to
match the main spindle. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulicallydriven sub-spindle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw drivensub-spindle.
M08 Coolant ONM08 turns the coolant pump ON and remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M05,
M09, M30, M51, M52, Reset, or Emergency Stop.
M09 Coolant OFFM09 turns the coolant pump OFF and remains active until canceled by M08, M13, M14, M53,
or M54. M09 is active at machine start-up and is activated by M00, M01, M02, M05, M30, M51,M52, Reset, or Emergency Stop.
M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option]M10 causes the high pressure coolant to be turned ON if this option is activated. The spindle
must be rotating and the guard door must be closed to activate the high pressure coolant fea-ture. M10 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M11, M30, or Emergency Stop.
M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option]M11 causes the high pressure coolant to be turned OFF. M11 is active at machine start-up
and remains active until canceled by M10.
M13 Main Spindle Forward/Coolant ONThe M13 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the forwarddirection when rotating clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M13 re-mains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Resetkey or Emergency Stop push button.
If M04 is programmed after M13, the spindle will run in the reverse direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.
M14 Main Spindle Reverse/Coolant ONThe M14 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the reversedirection when rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M14remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing theReset key or Emergency Stop push button.
If M03 is programmed after M14, the spindle will run in the forward direction and the coolantpump will remain ON.
1-32 M-320A
M17 Headwall Coolant ON
- NOTE -The headwall coolant system obtains coolant from the standard machine coolantsystem; therefore, the standard coolant system must be turned ON for headwallcoolant to flow.
The M17 command causes the headwall coolant to turn ON. M17 remains active until can-celed by M02, M18, M30, and Reset.
M18 Headwall Coolant OFFThe M18 command causes the headwall coolant to turn OFF. M18 is active at power-up and
remains active until canceled by M17.
M21 Open ColletThe M21 command causes the main spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M21 re-
mains active until canceled by M22.
M22 Close ColletThe M22 command causes the main spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M22 remains
active until canceled by M21.
M23 Activate Contouring Mode [Option]The M23 command activates contouring mode for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12
for additional information.
M24 Cancel Contouring Mode [Option]The M24 command cancels contouring mode, which is used for C Axis programming. Refer to
Chapter 12 for additional information.
M25 Part Catcher Retract [Option]
- CAUTION -Refer to Chapter 16 for information on using the part catcher with a ball-screwdriven sub-spindle.
MACHINES WITHOUT END-WORKING TURRET
The M25 command causes the part catcher to swing into position to drop the workpiece.This is an axial motion.
MACHINES WITH END-WORKING TURRET
The M25 command causes the part catcher plunger to retract, positioning the part catchercone parallel with the spindle centerline. The part catcher must be in this position to retrievethe workpiece from the spindle. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
M-320A 1-33
M26 Part Catcher Extend [Option]
- CAUTION -Refer to Chapter 16 for information on using the part catcher with a ball-screwdriven sub-spindle.
MACHINES WITHOUT END-WORKING TURRET
The M26 command causes the part catcher to swing into position to catch the workpiece.This is an axial motion.
MACHINES WITH END-WORKING TURRET
The M26 command causes the part catcher plunger to extend, moving the part catchercone into position to release the workpiece. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
M28 External Chucking ModeM28 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with external-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open atpower-up, it will remain open.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information onestablishing chucking modes.
M29 Internal Chucking ModeM29 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with internal-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open atpower-up, it will remain open.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information on estab-lishing chucking modes.
M30 End of ProgramM30 indicates the end of a program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It
stops the spindle, turns the coolant off, and rewinds the program to its beginning. The ColletOpen/Close push button is enabled. Refer also to M02.
M31 Program Rewind and RestartThe M31 command causes the program to be restarted automatically, when followed by an
M30 command.
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle [Option]M07 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the the sub-spindle to match the main
spindle. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spin-dle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
1-34 M-320A
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option]The M33 command causes the sub-spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwiseas viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00,M01, M02, M34, M35, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button. Referto Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spindle. Refer toChapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option]The M34 command causes the sub-spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-clockwise as viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceledby M00, M01, M02, M33, M35, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop pushbutton. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spindle.Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option]The M35 command causes the sub-spindle to stop, but DOES NOT stop axis motion unless
G99 is active. M35 remains active until canceled by M33 or M34. M35 is active at machinestart-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop.
M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON [Option]The M36 command turns the main spindle air blast ON if this option is active. The guard door
must be closed to activate the air blast feature.
M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option]The M37 command turns the main spindle air blast OFF.
M38 Automatic Guard Door Open [Option]The M38 command causes the main coolant guard door to open.
M39 Automatic Guard Door Close [Option]The M39 command causes the main coolant guard door to close.
M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact StopM42 is a modal command activating Exact Stop. Exact Stop permits approaching a pro-
grammed position exactly. The feedrate is decreased until it is equal to zero and the followingerror is eliminated. M42 is canceled by M30, M43, or Reset.
M43 Corner RoundingM43 is a modal command which is used if no exact position stop is desired from one block to
the next. M43 is active on machine power-up, after an M02/M30 command, and after the controlhas been reset. M43 cancels M42 Exact Stop.
M44 Enable Main Turret Bi-Directional IndexM44 enables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. M44 is active on machine
power-up. M44 is modal and cancels M45. M44 can be canceled by programming an M45 com-mand
M-320A 1-35
M45 Disable Main Turret Bi-Directional IndexM45 disables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. When M45 is active the main
turret top plate will rotate only in a clockwise direction, as viewed from the spindle. M45 is modaland cancels M44. M45 can be canceled by programming an M44 command or powering downthe control.
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON [Option]The M46 command turns the sub-spindle draw tube wiper air supply ON if this option is
active. The guard door must be closed to activate the wiper air supply.
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF [Option]The M47 command turns the sub-spindle draw tube wiper air supply OFF.
M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM48 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the use of the feedrate and
spindle override features. M48 remains active until canceled by M49.
M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle OverrideM49 cancels M48 and causes the feedrates and spindle speeds to operate at 100% of the
programmed values, ignoring the feedrate and spindle override controls. M49 remains active untilcanceled by an M02, M30, M48, a control OFF, or a control Reset.
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)M51 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the forward direction with
the coolant turned OFF. M51 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in thereverse direction with the coolant turned OFF. M51 cancels M52, M53, M54, and M55. Refer toChapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)M52 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the reverse direction with
the coolant turned OFF. M52 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in theforward direction with the coolant turned OFF. M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55. Refer toChapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON (Live Tooling Option Only)M53 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the forward direction with
the coolant turned ON. M53 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in thereverse direction with the coolant turned ON. M53 cancels M51, M52, M54, and M55. Refer toChapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON (Live Tooling Option Only)M54 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the reverse direction with
the coolant turned ON. M54 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in theforward direction with the coolant turned ON. M54 cancels M51, M52, M53, and M55. Refer toChapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)M55 causes live tooling to stop rotating and turns the coolant OFF. M55 cancels M51, M52,
M53, and M54. Refer to Chapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
1-36 M-320A
M56 Sub-Spindle Collet Open [Option]The M56 command causes the sub-spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M56 re-
mains active until canceled by M57.
M57 Sub-Spindle Collet Close [Option]The M57 command causes the sub-spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M57 remains
active until canceled by M56.
M60 Synchronization Code [Option]The M60 synchronization code used to coordinate machine activity commanded from the main
part program and an end-working turret sub-routine. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional informa-tion.
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option]The M66 command turns OFF the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle. Refer to Chap-
ter 16 for additional information.
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option]The M67 command switches the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle to low torque
mode. Refer to Chapter 16 for additional information.
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option]The M67 command switches the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle to normal (full)
torque mode. Refer to Chapter 16 for additional information.
M69 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option]M69 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with external-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the sub-spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the sub-spindle collet closer is open at power-up, it will remain open. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulicallydriven sub-spindle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw drivensub-spindle.
M70 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option]M70 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with internal-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the sub-spindle collet closer is checked on power-up andthe closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the sub-spindle collet closer is open at power-up, it will remain open. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulicallydriven sub-spindle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw drivensub-spindle.
M78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option]M78 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the lower axis feedrate override
feature on machines equipped with either the optional end-working turret or optional sub-spindle.M78 remains active until canceled by M79.
M79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option]M78 disables the lower axis feedrate override feature on machines equipped with either the
optional end-working turret or optional sub-spindle. M79 remains active until canceled by M78, acontrol OFF, or a control Reset.
M-320A 1-37
M81 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]M81 commands the control to begin execution of end-working turret sub-routine #1. Refer to
Chapter 13 for additional information.
M82 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2 [Option]M82 commands the control to begin execution of end-working turret sub-routine #2. Refer to
Chapter 13 for additional information.
M83 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3 [Option]M83 commands the control to begin execution of end-working turret sub-routine #3. Refer to
Chapter 13 for additional information.
M84 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle ForwardM84 causes the tailstock or hydraulic sub-spindle to move toward the spindle at a rapid tr-
averse rate of 300 in/min [7620 mm/min] until it trips a rapid-to-feed switch. At that point, thetailstock goes to a feedrate which may be preset by the machine operator.
Refer to: Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstockChapter 15 for information on programming the hydraulic sub-spindle
M85 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle RetractM85 causes the tailstock to move away from the machine spindle and stop at the first home
position encountered (adjustable home or fixed home position). M85 causes the hydraulic sub-spindle to move away from the machine spindle and stop at the fixed home position The tailstockor sub-spindle move at a rapid traverse rate of 300 in/min [7620 mm/min].
Refer to: Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstockChapter 15 for information on programming the hydraulic sub-spindle
M86 Tailstock HomeM86 causes the tailstock to move to the fixed home position at a rapid traverse rate of 300
in/min [7620 mm/min].
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstock
M88 Thermal CompensationM88 activates the thermal compensation feature on CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision™
lathes. Refer to Chapter 14 for additional information.
M93 Steady Rest Open [Option]M93 commands the steady rest to release the workpiece.
M94 Steady Rest Closed [Option]M93 commands the steady rest to clamp the workpiece.
Revised: September 28, 19991-38 M-320A
M98 Subprogram CallThis code must be in the main part program block which activates a subprogram. It is pro-
grammed with a P word, which specifies the subprogram number. Refer to “Subprograms”,Chapter 9.
M99 Subprogram EndThis code is used to return to the main part program after a subprogram has been completed.
Refer to “Subprograms”, in Chapter 9.
DIAMETER PROGRAMMINGHardinge CONQUEST® T42 series lathes are configured to allow the programmer to use part
diameter dimensions from the workpiece drawing as X word entries. With diameter programming,the workpiece centerline coincides with the spindle centerline unless an X axis Zero Offset isactive. Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”.
- CAUTION -It is strongly recommended that the X axis register in the Work Shift file be setto zero at all times.
Programming Notes:1. X words are programmed as diameters.
2. Data word formats for diameter programming:
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathes
X ±2.4 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.3 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is.00005 inches [.0005 mm] on the diameter.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
X ±2.5 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.4 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is.000005 inches [.00005 mm] on the diameter.
3. Dwell (G04) is not affected by diameter programming and is entered directly in secondsor milliseconds, depending on the data word used.
4. Incremental or continuous jogs are unaffected by diameter programming. The actualmoves are incremental, but the final absolute X position will be displayed on the controldisplay screen as an X diameter.
5. Tool geometry offsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Tool wearoffsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Z moves are not affected.
6. X axis “Distance to Go” is displayed as a diameter value.
Revised: September 28, 1999M-320A 1-39
GENERAL PROGRAM FORMAT
BEGINNING OF PROGRAM
% Stop Code (End of Record)
O_________ Letter “O” and the Program Number
G20 or G21 Inch or Metric Mode
BEGINNING OF OPERATION
N _____ (___________) Sequence Search Number and Message
G97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction
M98 P1 Call: Safe Start Subprogram
T_____ Index to Tool Station and Call Offset
X _____ Z_____ Move Tool To Activate Tool Offset
IF USING CONSTANT SURFACE SPEEDG50 S ______ Maximum RPM Limit
G96 S ______ Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed
IF USING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONG1 G41 (or) G42 X ____ Z ____ F100. Tool Nose Radius Compensation,
Non-Cutting Move Required, IPM Feedrate
G1 G99 X ____ Z ____ F ____ Machine Part, Inches [mm] Per RevolutionFeed
X ____ (and/or) Z ____ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool TipDiameter
M98 P1 (or) M98 P2 Call: Safe O.D. or I.D. End Subprogram
M01 Operation Stop
PROGRAM ENDINGM30 Rewind Program - Stop Machine
% Stop Code (End of Record)
BAR JOBUse the Repeat Mode push button on the Operator Panel
1-40 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 1-41
- NOTES -
1-42 M-320A
CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
INTRODUCTIONRegardless of the location of the origin of the work coordinate system used, execution of the
part program causes a single point (tool nose reference point) to be moved relative to andpositioned at coordinates specified by the program. However, the tool nose is not a point; it is aradius. Metal removal does not always take place at the same section of the tool nose. Orienta-tion of the tool nose relative to the work surface determines which portion of the tool is involvedin metal removal. (Orientation depends on tool geometry and the type of cut.) Programming theproper tool path for radius and angle contouring requires Tool Nose Radius Compensation. Thefollowing example illustrates the need for such compensation.
To machine the 30 degree taper shown in Figure 2.3, a contouring tool with a tool nosesimilar to the one shown in Figure 2.1 is used. The distance this tool nose extends from the Xaxis turret face is measured from the turret reference point to the X axis touch-off point. Theposition of the tool nose relative to the Z axis turret face is measured from the turret referencepoint to the Z axis touch-off point. If a Tool Offset is active while a part program is being exe-cuted, the “Actual Position” register will display the coordinates of the tool nose reference point.This point is formed by the X coordinate of the X axis touch-off point and the Z coordinate of theZ axis touch-off point. In this case, the tool nose reference point is not on the tool nose. Refer toFigure 2.1 .
However, this is not always the case. Some tools have only one touch-off point. Refer toFigure 2.2 . In such a case, the distance the nose extends from the turret centerline and Z axisturret face to this single touch-off point becomes the tool nose reference point. For such tools,the tool nose reference point is located on the tool nose. Some numerical control manuals referto the tool nose reference point as the “imaginary tool tip”. This term can be misleading and isavoided in this manual.
TI2373
Z-AXISTOUCH-OFF
POINT
X-AXISTOUCH-OFF
POINT
TOOL NOSEREFERENCE POINT
+Z
+X
Figure 2.1 - Tool Nose with X and Z-AxisTouch-off Points
TI2374
X-AXISTOUCH-OFF
POINT
+Z
+X
Figure 2.2 - Tool Nose with an X-AxisTouch-off Point
M-320A 2-1
To properly machine the section of the part shown in Figure 2.3, metal removal must takeplace along the line connecting X.4 Z0. and X6. Z-.1732 . However, if Tool Nose Radius Com-pensation is ignored and these coordinates are programmed, the resulting cut will be oversize.Block N50 (See Figure 2.3) moves the tool nose reference point from X.4 Z.2 to X.4 Z0. andblock N60 moves the reference point from X.4 Z0. to X6. Z-.1732 . The tool does not reach thefull depth of cut, represented by the dashed line in Figure 2.3 . The actual cut, represented bythe solid line parallel to the dashed line, is oversize. The amount oversize is a function of theangle of the taper and the size of the tool nose radius.
Without automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation to make the control generate the propertool path, the programmer must perform the necessary calculations to offset the effect of the toolnose radius.
As with tapers, any change in the tool nose radius will require program revisions for all con-touring involving arcs.
With automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation, the programmer can write a part program asif a zero radius tool were being used. Programs are written using coordinates taken directly fromthe workpiece. The operator stores the radius value of each tool in the Tool Offset files and thecontrol makes all necessary calculations and compensations as the program is executed. If atool is changed, the operator simply modifies the radius in the Tool Offset file and the controlrecalculates the compensation as the program is executed again. Time consuming manual calcu-lations are eliminated, as is the threat of large scale part program revisions due to toolingchanges.
TOOL ORIENTATION NUMBERBefore Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be activated in a program, the tool nose radius
value and the tool orientation number must be stored in the tool geometry offset file. The toolorientation number describes the center of the tool nose radius relative to the X and Z touch-offpoints. A diagram of the orientation codes appears in Figure 2.4 . A diagram showing the propersigns for tool offsets appears in Figure 2.5 .
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool nose radius values and tool orientationnumbers in the tool offset file.
N40 G01 G99 ;N50 Z0. F.01 ;N60 X.6 Z-.1732 ;N70 Z-.75 ;
TI2375
START POINT(X.4 Z.2)
A(X.4 Z0.)
B(X.6 Z-.1732)
C(X.6 Z-.75)
30°
30°
.1732
.1
Z ZEROCL
+X
+Z
r=.01
Figure 2.3 - Example of Oversize Cut Caused ByAbsence of Tool Nose Radius Compensation
2-2 M-320A
ACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONA tool nose radius value and tool orientation number must be activated before entering Tool
Nose Radius Compensation mode. Tool nose radius values and tool orientation codes are acti-vated along with Tool Offsets by a programmed T word with the data word format T4: Txxyy
Where: xx = Turret Station
yy = Tool Offset Number
A programmed T0 command deactivates all active tool offset data.
A G41 or G42 Preparatory Command is programmed to activate Tool Nose Radius Compen-sation. This block is called the entry block. The G41 or G42 entry block must be a non-cuttingmove on both axes. At least one axis must move a distance equal to or greater than the radiusof the tool nose.
To determine which G code to use, imagine you are sitting on the tool nose facing the direc-tion of tool motion. If the workpiece is on your right, G41 is the correct code. If the workpiece ison your left, G42 is the correct code. (Refer to Figure 2.6)
The GE Fanuc 18T control has a two block look-ahead capability, which enables the control tocomplete a compensated move with the tool in position to begin the next compensated move.While the currently active block is being executed, the control searches ahead to read andprocess the next two data blocks. Refer to Figure 2.7 for an comparison of programmed toolpaths with and without Tool Nose Radius Compensation based on similar workpiece contours.
TI2376
8
6TURRET FACESPINDLE
5 7
34
21
+X
+Z
Figure 2.4 - Tool Nose Radius OrientationCodes
TI2377
TURRET TOP PLATE
SPINDLEFACE
+X -Z+X +Z
-X +Z
TOOL REFERENCEPOSITION
Figure 2.5 - Tool Dimension Signs
M-320A 2-3
TI2378G41 G42
+X
+Z
+X
+Z
CL
CL
CL
CL
Figure 2.6 - G41/G42 Diagram
TI2379
Tool CompensationActive
Tool CompensationNot Active
CL
CLCL
CL
Tool Compensation
Tool Compensation
Tool Compensation
Tool Compensation
Figure 2.7 - Tool Path Comparisons
2-4 M-320A
ENTERING AND EXITING THE WORKPIECE WITHTOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
When entering and exiting the workpiece, axis motion should be perpendicular to the surfaceof the workpiece. Refer to Figure 2.8 for an illustration of correct axis motion.
If axis motion is not perpendicular with the surface of the workpiece, the tool may be “boxedin”. When a tool is “boxed in”, it will not reach the programmed end point. Refer to Figure 2.9 foran illustration of incorrect axis motion and “boxing the tool in”.
TI2380
G42
ENTRY
EXIT
WORKPIECE
G42
Figure 2.8 - Correct Axis Motion
TI2381
G42
ENTRY
EXIT
WORKPIECE
G42
Figure 2.9 - Incorrect Axis Motion
M-320A 2-5
TO SWITCH G41/G42 CODE WITH TOOLNOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
- CAUTION -Due to the way in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, G41or G42 should be programmed in a block with non-cutting linear motion. IfTool Nose Radius Compensation is activated in a block in which cutting iscommanded, undesirable axis motion may occur.
To switch from G41 to G42 or vice versa while Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, it isnot necessary to program a G40 to cancel the active code. Programming the desired G41 orG42 will cancel the active code and activate the new G code. For example, if G41 is active andG42 is programmed, G41 will be canceled and G42 will be activated.
Due to the way Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, this linear move shouldusually be a non-cutting move. The notable exception is an axis reversal. Axis reversal is dis-cussed below.
AXIS REVERSALS WITH TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVEAxis reversals are possible with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active. As mentioned in the
previous section, an axis reversal represents a case when a G41/G42 switch can occur in acutting move.
In the sample program shown in Figure 2.10,G41 is activated in the move to Point A (BlockN60).
Block N60 establishes the feedrate and movesthe tool nose reference position to point “A” for thefacing operation.
Block N70 commands the facing move frompoint “A” to point “C”. The position of the center ofthe tool nose radius at the end of block N70 is onthe spindle centerline. Therefore, at the end ofblock N70, the tool nose reference point is onetool nose radius to the -X side of the spindle cen-terline.
Block N80 switches the code to G42. No Z axismotion takes place as a result of the G41/G42switch. If Tool Compensation was not changedfrom G41 to G42 in block N80, the control wouldassume that the part is still on the right side of thetool and an overcutting alarm would occur.
Block N90 moves the tool back up the face ofthe part to point “D”.
Block N100 commands the turning move frompoint “D” in the -Z direction.
In summary, axis reversals are possible, but beaware of the tool nose radius “overshoot” at theend of the move prior to the reversal.
N50 G00 G41 X1.2 Z.1 ;N60 G01 G99 Z0. F.01 ;N70 X-.02 ;N80 G42 ;N90 X.8 ;N100 Z-5. ;
TI2382
r=.01A(X1.2 Z0.)
B(X.8 Z0.)
B’(X.79 Z0.)
C(X0. Z0.)
C’(X-.01 Z0.)
CL
CL
C(X0. Z0.)
C’(X-.01 Z0.)
D(X.8 Z0.)
A
B
Figure 2.10 - Axis Reversal withTool Compensation Active
2-6 M-320A
MODES IN WHICH TOOL NOSE RADIUSCOMPENSATION IS NOT PERFORMED
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following automatic cycles:
G74 Auto Drilling Cycle
G75 Auto Grooving Cycle
G76 Auto Threading Cycle
G92 Canned Threading Cycle
- NOTE -If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active before one of these auto cycles isexecuted, Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the cycle andthen reactivated after the cycle is completed.
Tool Nose Radius Compensation also is not performed during the G32 ConstantLead Threadcutting mode or the optional G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting mode.
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES WITH TOOLNOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not active during G71, G72, or G73 roughing cycles, butis active during the G70 finishing cycle. To use Tool Nose Radius Compensation in the multiplerepetitive finishing cycle, Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to thestart point. If the same tool is used to rough and finish the workpiece, the move to the start pointoccurs prior to the roughing cycle. Compensation will be suppressed until the finishing cycle isexecuted. If a different tool is used to finish turn the workpiece, compensation is activated in themove to the start point prior to the G70 cycle.
CANNED TURNING AND FACING CYCLES WITHTOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be used with the G90 Canned Turning Cycle and theG94 Canned Facing Cycle, but it must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90 orG94 canned cycle. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in either cycle, axis motion is asfollows:
G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Figure 2.11):
1. The tool moves from the start point to thecompensated position to begin the turn.
2. The tool ends the turn at the compensatedposition to begin facing the shoulder.
3. At the end of the facing move, the toolnose reference point is at the X coordinateof the start point.
4. The tool then returns to the start point. Atthe end of the move, the tool nose refer-ence point is at the coordinates of thestart point.
TI2383
Feed
Start Point
Rapid Traverse
CL
Figure 2.11 - Axis Motion During a G90Canned Turning Cycle
M-320A 2-7
G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Figure 2.12):
1. The tool moves from the start point to thecompensated position to begin the turn.
2. The tool ends the face at the compen-sated position to begin the turn.
3. At the end of the turn, the tool nose refer-ence point is at the Z coordinate of thestart point.
4. The tool then returns to the start point. Atthe end of the move, the tool nose refer-ence point is at the coordinates of thestart point.
TOOL MOVED AWAY FROM THE WORKPIECE WITHTOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
If a program is stopped during the execution of contouring with Tool Nose Radius Compensa-tion active and the tool is moved away from the workpiece, either by a manual Jog operation oran Manual Data Input command, do not resume the cycle from this new position. Reset theprogram and perform a Program Restart operation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION RELATED ALARMS
ALARM 033
A point of intersection cannot be determined for Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
ALARM 034
Entry or exit move is programmed in G02 or G03 mode. The control must be in G00 orG01 mode to activate or deactivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
ALARM 035
Skip function (G31) has been programmed with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active.
ALARM 038
Arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. The probable cause of the alarmis a G02/G03 programming error. It is possible that a G01 move was not programmed aftercutting the arc.
ALARM 039
An Insert Chamfer or Insert Arc was commanded in an entry block, exit block, or in aswitch between G41 and G42. The program may cause overcutting to occur.
ALARM 040
Overcutting will occur with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active and a G90 or G94canned cycle programmed.
TI2384
Start Point
Rapid TraverseFeed
CL
Figure 2.12 - Axis Motion During a G94Canned Facing Cycle
2-8 M-320A
ALARM 041
Overcutting will occur because of one of the following conditions:
1. A programmed groove or inside corner is smaller than the tool nose radius.
2. The direction of the tool nose reference point is between 90 degrees and 270 degreesdifferent than the programmed path.
DEACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONProgram a G40 along with a non-cutting linear move in both axes to deactivate Tool Nose
Radius Compensation. Alarm “034 PROGRAM” will appear if circular motion is programmed inthe exit block. Alarm “039 PROGRAM” will appear if an Insert Chamfer or Insert Radius isprogrammed in the exit block.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION PROGRAMMING RULES1. Store tool nose radius values and orientation codes along side the appropriate offset
numbers in the Tool Offset file. The offset must be activated prior to activation of ToolNose Radius Compensation.
2. To activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, program a G41 or G42 along with non-cut-ting linear motion in both axes. The motion on either axis must be equal to or greaterthan the radius value of the tool nose. To determine which G code to use, image your-self sitting on the tool tip facing in the direction of the tool motion. If the workpiece is onyour right, the correct code is G41. If the workpiece is on your left, the correct code isG42.
3. Entry to and exit from the workpiece should be perpendicular to the surface of the work-piece.
4. To switch from G41 to G42 and vice versa, program the appropriate G code in a blockby itself before motion in the other direction.
5. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following modes: G32, G34,G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, and G92.
6. When Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, only one data block which does notcontain axis motion may be programmed between blocks which contain axis motion. Iftwo or more non-motion blocks are programmed consecutively, undesirable machine be-havior in the form of under-cutting or over-cutting may occur.
7. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with G90 or G94 canned cycles, ToolNose Radius Compensation must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90or G94 cycle.
8. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with a G70 multiple repetitive finishingcycle, Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to the start pointprior to the execution of the G70 cycle.
9. When clearing the workpiece, axis motion should move the tool nose a distance of atleast three times the tool nose diameter from the workpiece
M-320A 2-9
- NOTES -
2-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
FEEDRATEFeedrate is specified by the value after the word address F. This value can be expressed in
inches/millimeters per minute (G98 mode) or as inches/millimeters per revolution (G99 mode).The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Programmed feedrates greater than themaximum feedrate allowed will default to the maximum value upon program execution. Themaximum feedrates are shown as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP MachineX Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L MachinesY Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 and T42SP MachinesZ Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 and T42SP MachinesZ Axis: 1004 [25500] CONQUEST T42-L Machines
To convert in/min [mm/min] to in/rev [mm/rev], divide the in/min [mm/min] feedrate by theprogrammed spindle speed:
English: in/min ÷ rev/min = in/revMetric: mm/min ÷ rev/min = mm/rev
To convert in/rev [mm/rev] to in/min [mm/min], multiply the in/rev [mm/rev] feedrate by theprogrammed spindle speed:
English: in/rev x rev/min = in/minMetric: mm/rev x rev/min = mm/min
To override programmed feedrates, use the Feedrate Override switches. The Feedrate Over-ride switches are disabled during threading cycles, except when set to 0%. To override rapidtraverse rate, use the Rapid override switch.
- CAUTION -If the Feedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0% during a threading cycle, X andZ axis motion will STOP.
M-320A 3-1
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMINGIn absolute programming, the X, Y, and Z data words are used to specify the end point of a
move as a coordinate on the work coordinate system. For example, the following command callsfor a linear move to position the tool nose reference point at X.25 Z5. on the work coordinatesystem:
G01 G98 X.25 Z5. F10. ;
In incremental programming, the U, V, and W words are used to specify the end point of amove as an incremental distance from the current position on the work coordinate system.
U = Incremental distance on the X axis
U- = Toward the operator
U+ = Away from the operator
V = Incremental distance on the Y axis
V- = Toward the face of the main spindle
V+ = Away from the face of the main spindle
W = Incremental distance on the Z axis
W- = Toward the face of the main spindle
W+ = Away from the face of the main spindle
For example, the following command calls for a linear move in which the cross slide moves.25 inches away from the operator and the upper carriage moves 2.5 inches toward the spindleface:
G01 G98 U.5 W-2.5 F10. ;
Absolute and Incremental commands may be used together in a block. For example, thefollowing command causes the cross slide to move .375 inches toward the operator from thecurrent cross slide position and also positions the upper carriage at Z coordinate point 6.5 on thework coordinate system:
G01 G98 U-.75 Z6.5 F10. ;
If both X and U, Y and V, or Z and W are programmed in the same block, the one specifiedlast is effective. For example, the following block causes the upper carriage to move .5 inchesaway from the spindle face from the current carriage position. (The Z word is ignored).
G01 G98 Z.4 W.5 F10. ;
3-2 M-320A
INTERPOLATIONInterpolation describes the function of the control when it decodes a block of programmed
data commanding axis motion. Given the type of motion, the feedrate, and the end point, thecontrol defines the tool path by generating a series of intermediate points between the currentslide position and the programmed end point. In the case of tapers and arcs, it also calculatesthe proper feedrate for each axis to produce the correct tool path.
There are two standard types of interpolation performed by the GE Fanuc 18T CNC control:
Linear Interpolation
Circular Interpolation
LINEAR INTERPOLATION
Linear Interpolation is commanded by the G01 command. G01 is a modal code, which meansthat it will stay active until a G00 code (positioning) or a G02/G03 code (Circular Interpolation) isprogrammed. Therefore, it is necessary to program a G01 to return to Linear Interpolation from acurrently active G00, G02, or G03 code because these codes are also modal.
With G01 active, program blocks command the tool to move in a straight line from its currentposition to a programmed end point. This end point is specified as either a coordinate position(X, Z) on the work coordinate system or as an incremental movement (U, W) from the currentslide position. For example:
G01 G99 X.25 Z2. F.008
Slides move from current position to work coordinate X.25 Z2.
G01 G99 U.4 W-1. F.008
X axis moves .2 inches in the positive direction as Z axis moves 1 inch in the negativedirection.
Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius
- NOTE -Insert chamfer/insert corner radius cannot be programmed in a threadcutting block.
If two linear (G01) moves intersect, it is possible to insert a chamfer or an arc between themwithout adding a third program block or switching from linear interpolation to circular interpolationand back again. The following rules apply:
1. Both moves must be a G01 move.
2. The end point of the first block is the point where the linear moves would intersect ifthere was no chamfer or corner radius inserted. It is not the start point of the chamfer orcorner radius.
INSERT CHAMFER
To insert a chamfer, program a “,C” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks.These two linear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value of “,C” isunsigned. The (,) comma must precede the C word.
M-320A 3-3
INSERT CORNER RADIUS
To insert an arc between two linear (G01) moves, program an “,R” word in the first motionblock. The value of the “,R” word is the radius of the arc to be inserted. The value of “,R” isunsigned. The (,) comma must precede the R word.
ALARM MESSAGES FOR INSERT CHAMFER/INSERT CORNER RADIUS
Alarm 050:
Chamfer or corner radius is commanded in a block which also includes a threadcuttingcommand.
Alarm 051:
The move direction or move amount in the block following a block specifying a chamferor corner radius was not adequate.
Alarm 052:
The block after a block specifying a chamfer or corner radius is not in G01 mode. (Forexample, the second block is in G02 or G03 mode).
Alarm 053:
C or R has been programmed without a comma. The comma is required.
Alarm 054:
The next G01 block commands tapered motion (both X and Z data words are pro-grammed) along with a command for inserting a chamfer or corner radius.
Alarm 055:
The axis motion in the second block is less than the chamfer or corner radius valuespecified in the first block.
N15 G01 G99 X0. Z0. F.008 ;
N20 X.5 ,C.01 ;
N25 Z-.5 ,C.01 ;
N30 X1. ,R.01 ;
N35 W-.5 ,R.01 ;
N40 X1.5 ,R.01 ;
N45 Z-1.5 ;
TI2367
1.50
.010.010
.010.010
.010R
.010R
.010R
1.00
.50
1.00
.50
Figure 3.1 - Insert Chamfer/Radius Sample Program
3-4 M-320A
TI2368
INSERT CHAMFER
INSERT ARC
,C ,C
,C ,C
,C ,C
,C ,C
+X
+X
+Z
+Z
+X
+Z
+X
+Z
,R ,R
,R ,R
,R,R
,R,R
Z(W)____ ,C____X(U)____
X(U)____ ,C____Z(W)____
X(U)____ ,R____Z(W)____
Z(W)____ ,R____X(U)____
Figure 3.2 - Insert Chamfer/Insert Arc Diagram
M-320A 3-5
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
In Circular Interpolation the control uses the information contained in a single data block togenerate an arc. There are two types of Circular Interpolation:
Clockwise Arc (G02)
Counterclockwise Arc (G03)
The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) defines clockwise and counter-clockwise arcs asfollows:
G02 Clockwise ArcAn arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of
the tool with respect to the workpiece is clockwise when viewing the plane of motion in thenegative direction of the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during a G02arc will appear clockwise, as viewed by the machine operator.
G03 Counter-Clockwise ArcAn arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of
the tool with respect to the workpiece is counterclockwise when viewing the plane of motionin the negative direction of the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during aG03 arc will appear counterclockwise, as viewed by the machine operator.
Besides containing the G code for the rotational direction of tool movement, the data blockspecifying circular interpolation must contain information indicating the position of the arc endpoint and the location of the arc center. Data words used to specify these parameters are sum-marized in Figure 3.4 .
Note the differences in the definitions depending on whether Tool Nose Radius Compensationis active or inactive. As indicated with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active, the location of thearc end point and arc center is independent of the tool nose radius. These dimensions are takenfrom the part and the control performs the necessary compensation to generate the proper arc.Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.
Sample Part ProgramFigure 3.3 illustrates a sample tool path and the basic program structure required for Circular
Interpolation. The tool tip is programmed to move to the start point of each arc using G01 (LinearInterpolation). The program block commanding Circular Interpolation specifies the type of arc(G02 or G03), the end point of the arc, and the radius. G01 is progammed to cancel CircularInterpolation after each arc has been completed.
3-6 M-320A
Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation1. In circular interpolation, the feedrate along the arc (feedrate tangent to the arc) is held
within ±2% of the programmed feedrate.
2. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center, and either I or K is equal to zero, that wordmay be omitted.
3. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center and both I and K are programmed as zerowith Tool Nose Radius Compensation inactive, the tool will move linearly from the arcstart point to the arc end point. However, if I and K are programmed as zero with ToolNose Radius Compensation active, alarm message “038 PROGRAM” will appear on thecontrol display screen. This alarm indicates that overcutting will occur because the arcstart point coincides with the arc center.
4. If I, K, and R are programmed in the same data block, the control will ignore the I and Kand generate the arc using R to locate the arc center.
5. If R is used to locate an arc center, a zero degree arc is assumed (no tool motionoccurs) if any of the following three conditions occurs:
a) If X and Z are the coordinates of the start point.b) If X, U, Z, and W are omitted.c) If U and W are programmed as zero (U0. W0.).
6. If R is used to indicate the arc center, but the R value is less than half the distance fromthe arc start point to the arc end point, R is ignored and a half circle is produced whichconnects the arc start point and arc end point.
7. Circular Interpolation may be switched without canceling with G01.
8. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be programmed to cancel Circular Interpolation.
N1 G1 G99 X0. Z0. F.01 ;
N2 X1. ;
N3 Z-1. ;
N4 G2 X1.2 Z-1.1 R.1 ;
N5 G1 X2. ;
N6 G3 X2.5 Z-1.35 R.25 ;
N7 G1 Z-2. ;
TI2702
+X
+Z
N1(X0. Z0.)
N2N3
N4
N5
N6N7
.10 Radius
.25 Radius
CL
Figure 3.3 - Circular Interpolation Sample Program
M-320A 3-7
Parameter Command Definition
RotationalDirection
G02
G03
Location ofArc Center
I,K
Definition(Tool Nose Radius
Compensation Inactive)
Definition(Tool Nose Radius
Compensation Active)
Incremental distance from the centerof the tool nose radius at the startpoint to the arc center.
IMPORTANT: This value must besigned. (Also note that thisincremental distance depends on thesize of the tool nose radius.)
Refer to Figure 3.5 .
Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc center asmeasured on the workpiece.
IMPORTANT: This value must besigned. (This incremental distanceremains the same regardless of thesize of the tool nose radius.)
Refer to Figure 3.7 .
R
Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the center of the toolnose radius to the arc center. Thisvalue is unsigned. (This distancedepends on the size of the tool noseradius.)
NOTE: The R word can only be usedwhen the arc ≤ 180 degrees.
Refer to Figure 3.5 .
Radius of the arc. The radius ismeasured from the arc start point tothe arc center as measured on theworkpiece. This value is unsigned.(This distance is independent of thesize of the tool nose radius.)
NOTE: The R word can only be usedwhen the arc ≤ 180 degrees.
Refer to Figure 3.7 .
Location ofArc End Point
X,Z
Coordinates of the tool nosereference point at the arc end point.(These coordinates depend on thesize of the tool nose radius andgeometric configuration of the toolnose.)
Refer to Figure 3.6 .
Coordinates of the arc end point asmeasured on the workpiece. (Thesecoordinates are independent of thesize of the tool nose radius andgeometric configuration of the toolnose.)
Refer to Figure 3.8 .
U,W
Incremental distance from theposition of the tool nose referencepoint at the arc start point to theposition of the tool nose referencepoint at the arc end point. (Thesecoordinates depend on the size ofthe tool nose radius and geometricconfiguration of the tool nose.)
Refer to Figure 3.6 .
Incremental distance from the arcstart point to the arc end point asmeasured on the workpiece. (Theincremental distance is independentof the size of the tool nose radiusand geometric configuration of thetool nose.)
Refer to Figure 3.8 .
+Z
+X
+Z
+X
Figure 3.4 - Circular Interpolation Parameters
3-8 M-320A
R
KTI2369
R
K I
I
CLCL
ARC CENTER
ARC CENTER
+X
+Z
Tool Nose RadiusCompensation Inactive
Figure 3.5 - Arc Center Parameters
U
ARC CENTER+Z
TI2370+XW
U
(X,Z)
ARC CENTERCL
W
(X,Z)
CL
Tool Nose RadiusCompensation Inactive
Figure 3.6 - Arc End Point Parameters
I
R
+Z
TI2371+X
ARC CENTER
ARC CENTER
K
CLK
R
I
CL
Tool Nose RadiusCompensation Active
Figure 3.7 - Arc Center Parameters
TI2372+X
+Z
ARC CENTER
W
U
(X,Z)
CL
ARC CENTER
W
U
(X,Z)
CL
Tool Nose RadiusCompensation Active
Figure 3.8 - Arc End Point Parameters
M-320A 3-9
- NOTES -
3-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS
WORK SHIFT (Zero Offset)The work shift offset shifts the origin of the work coordinate system. Work Shift values (Z) are
stored in the Work Shift file. The value stored in this file is active at all times.
- CAUTION -The Work Shift file contains an X and a Z shift register. The X axis register inthe Work Shift file should be set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis Work Shift file must be a negative number.
The values stored in the Work Shift file are added to the Absolute Position registers, thusshifting the origin of the work coordinate system by the amount stored in the Work Shift file. Forexample, if the Z axis is at 14 inches and the operator stores Z-2.5 in the Work Shift file, theAbsolute Position registers would then display Z11.5 [14 +(- 2.5)].
Immediately after a Work Shift value is stored, the control adds it to the Absolute Positionregisters. The registers will remain modified until the Work Shift offset values are set to zero bythe operator or from the part program.
Typically, the part length is stored as the Z Work Shift offset and the X Work Shift offset ISNOT USED (set to zero). Since the Work Shift value is added to the Absolute Position registers,the part length is stored as a negative Z value. With the part length stored in the Work Shift file,the origin of the Absolute coordinate system is the intersection of the part face and the spindlecenterline.
STORING A WORK SHIFT OFFSET FROM THE PART PROGRAM
The Work Shift offset may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.
- CAUTION -The Work Shift file contains an X and a Z SHIFT VALUE register. It is stronglyrecommended that the X SHIFT VALUE register in the Work Shift file be set tozero at all times.
Programming Format:
G10 P0 X0 Z_____ ; or
G10 P0 X0 W____;
P0: Selects the Work Shift offset as the offset file to be modified.
X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)
Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)
W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)
In an absolute command, the value(s) specified in addresses X and/or Z are set as the WorkShift Offset value.
In an incremental command, the value specified in address W is added to the current Z WorkShift Offset.
Use of this command in a program allows the work shift Z to advance incrementally.
M-320A 4-1
TOOLING(MAIN TURRET)
SQUARE SHANK TOOLS
For optimum performance, CONQUEST® T42 series lathes are designed to use qualifiedsquare shank tool holders. Since these tools are length, width, and height qualified, both set-uptime and downtime due to tool replacement are greatly reduced.
Qualified Tool HoldersQualified tool holder dimensions are held to ±.003 inch [.076 mm]. A left-hand square shank
qualified tool holder is illustrated in Figure 4.1 . Refer to Table 4.1 for qualified tool holderdimensions.
A
G
C
B
TI2701
F
H
Figure 4.1 - Qualified Tool Holder
Dimension English (in.) Metric (mm)
A 0.750 20.000
B 0.750 20.000
C 4.500 125.000
F 1.000 25.000
G 0.250 5.000
H 0.750 20.000
Table 4.1 - Qualified Tooling Dimensions
Revised: May 7, 19974-2 M-320A
TOOL OFFSETSThe Tool Offset file is made up of two types of offsets: Tool Geometry Offsets and Tool Wear
Offsets. The control has the capacity to store 32 sets of each offset type (Offsets 01 through 32)in separate files.
- CAUTION -Information stored in the Geometry and Wear Offset files is NOT automat-ically converted into the correct units when a programmed G20 or G21 com-mand switches programming resolution from inch to metric or vice versa.Offsets in the desired unit of measure should be entered after the control hasbeen set to the proper mode, inch (G20) vs metric (G21). If a G20 or G21 isprogrammed after the tool offsets are entered, the decimal point will beshifted one place to the left or right. If start-up mode is G20 (inch) and theprogram switches to G21 (metric), the offset decimal point will shift one placeto the right. If start-up mode is G21 (metric) and the program switches to G20(inch), the offset decimal point will shift one place to the left.
The following information is stored in the Tool Geometry Offset file:
X Tool Dimension (Main Turret)
Diameter distance from the X axis tool touch-off point to the main turret reference point.Sign is determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret referencepoint.
Y Tool Dimension (End-Working Turret)
Distance from the Y axis tool touch-off point to the face of the tool bushings in the end-working turret. Sign is determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to theface of the tool bushings.
Z Tool Dimension (Main Turret)
Distance from the Z axis tool touch-off point to the main turret reference point. Sign isdetermined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret reference point.
- NOTE -Refer to Chapter 2 for a description of the tool nose reference point.
Refer to Chapter 5 for a description of coordinate system reference positions.
Tool Orientation:
The orientation code describes the location of the center of the tool nose in relation to thetool nose reference point.
Tool Nose Radius Value:
The distance from the cutting edge to the center of the tool nose radius.
The Tool Wear Offset file allows the operator to enter minor dimensional changes for eachtool to compensate for tool wear. The Tool Wear Offset files coincide with the Geometry Offsetfiles. When a tool offset is activated, the control looks at the corresponding Tool Wear offset andperforms the necessary corrections to compensate for tool wear.
M-320A 4-3
The Tool Offset files allow the operator to easily make corrections resulting from tool changes,thus large-scale modifications to the part programs are eliminated.
Tool Offsets are activated by the last two digits in the T word. The first two digits specify theturret station. The data word format for the T word is T4.
A suggested method for numbering the offsets that will assign a number related to the turretstation is as follows:
TURRET STATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FIRST OFFSET 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
SECOND OFFSET 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Offsets 13 through 20 are extra and can be used if needed.
ENTERING TOOL NOSE RADIUS VALUE AND ORIENTATION
- NOTE -If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the tool nose radius value and thetool quadrant must be entered for each tool which uses Tool Nose Radius Compen-sation.
1. Press the Offset Setting key.
2. Press the Offset soft key to access the Tool Offset pages.
3. Press the Geometry soft key to display the tool geometry offsets.
4. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the R data field for the desiredoffset.
5. Enter the tool nose radius value and press the Input soft key.
- NOTE-The “T” value defines the orientation of the tool tip and has a range from 0 through9. Refer to Figure 4.2 .
6. Use the cursor keys to position the cursorat the T data field for the desired offset.
7. Enter the tool orientation code numberand press the Input soft key.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each tool, asrequired.
TI2376
8
6TURRET FACESPINDLE
5 7
34
21
+X
+Z
0 or 9
Figure 4.2 - Tool Nose Radius OrientationCodes
4-4 M-320A
TO STORE TOOL OFFSETS FROM THE PART PROGRAM
Tool Offsets may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.
Programming Format:
G10 P_____ X_____ Y_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ; or
G10 P_____ U_____ V_____ W_____ C_____ Q_____;
P: Selects the Tool Offset file to be modified.
For Wear Offset: P = Wear Offset Number
For Geometry Offset: P = 100 + Geometry Offset Number (2 place Format)
Examples of P words used for Geometry Offsets:
For Geometry Offset #1: P10001
For Wear Offset #1: P1
For Geometry Offset #15: P10015
For Wear Offset #15: P15
X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)
Y: Offset value on the Y axis (absolute)
Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)
U: Offset value on the X axis (incremental)
V: Offset value on the Y axis (incremental)
W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)
R: Tool nose radius offset value (absolute) †
C: Tool nose radius offset value (incremental) †
Q: Tool nose orientation code †
† Used for X and Z axis only
Absolute and incremental values for different axes may be programmed in the same offsetcommand line.
Examples: G10 P_____ U_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ;
G10 P_____ X_____ W_____ R_____ Q_____ ;
Revised: November 13, 1997M-320A 4-5
ACTIVATING TOOL OFFSETS
Tool offsets are activated by a T word having the format T4. The first two numbers select theturret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position. The last two numbers specify which tooloffsets in the tool geometry and wear offset tables are to be used with the selected turret posi-tion.
Example: N0120 T0616 ;
In data block N0120, turret station 6 will be indexed to the cutting position and the tool offsetsstored on line 16 in the tool geometry and wear offset tables will be activated.
The leading zero in the T word may be omitted:
T0101 = T101
- CAUTION -If tool offsets are not to be called up with a turret index, the last two numbersin the T word MUST be “00" (Example: T0100). If no numbers are pro-grammed in the last two places, the control will use the numbers pro-grammed in the first two places as the tool offset and the turret will not index(Example: T01 will be interpreted by the control as T0001).
- NOTE -When a T0 is commanded, the offset is cancelled.
Tool offset cancellation (T0) will occur in the next programmed axis movement for the X and Zaxes. The next programmed X axis movement will cancel the X axis offset and move the turretreference point to the programmed X axis position. The next programmed Z axis movement willcancel the Z axis offset and move the turret reference point to the programmed Z axis position.
When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block containing axis motion, the tooloffset motion is computed with the programmed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move di-rectly to the corrected axis position at the programmed feedrate.
When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block without axis motion, the tool offsetmove will occur in the next block containing axis motion. The tool offset motion is computed withthe programmed axis position, causing the turret reference point to move directly to the correctedaxis position at the programmed feedrate.
Tool offsets are deactivated when the machine is first powered up or when the Reset key ispressed.
4-6 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 4-7
- NOTES -
4-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
HOW THE CONTROL POSITIONS THE SLIDESTo understand work coordinate programming, it is helpful to consider how the control positions
the slides. We will begin by examining how the slides are positioned on a manual lathe. At theonset this may seem like an in-depth discussion of the obvious, but bear with us, the point of thisexercise is to show the similarities between the operation of a manual lathe and the operation ofa CONQUEST® T42 series lathe.
On a manual lathe, the carriage and cross slide are positioned by manually turning a handleattached to a lead screw. The operator positions each slide by reading the dial attached to eachhandle. Let’s assume that on the manual lathe each slide has 10 pitch lead screw. Therefore,each revolution of the lead screw advances the slide .1 inch. If the dial has 100 graduations,each graduation equals 1/100 of a revolution or .001 inch slide travel.
If the operator wants to move a slide .306 inch, he turns the handle in the desired directionand counts three and 6/100 revolutions of the dial. How close to 6/100 of a revolution he getslargely depends on his ability to manually position the dial at the proper graduation.
Like the slides on the manual lathe, the CNC lathe carriage and cross slide are positioned byrotating a lead screw. However, there are no handles to rotate the lead screws on the CNClathe. Instead, each lead screw is rotated by a servo motor. The revolutions of each screw arecounted by an encoder. The encoder is an integral part of the axis drive motor and continuouslymonitors the radial position of the lead screw. Information from the encoder is fed to the controlwhere it is converted into useful output information to produce the correct feedrate and slideposition.
- NOTE -References to Y axis are valid only for lathes equipped with an optional end-work-ing turret or optional ball screw driven sub-spindle.
The cross slide (X axis) on the CNC lathe has a 6 millimeter pitch lead screw. One revolutionof the cross slide lead screw equals 6 millimeter (.2362 inches) of slide travel. The upper car-riage (Z axis) and lower carriage (Y axis) on the CNC lathe have an 8 millimeter pitch leadscrew. One revolution of a carriage lead screw equals 8 millimeter (.3150 inches) of slide travel.As the lead screw rotates so does the encoder shaft, which causes the encoder to generatepositioning and velocity data. This data is fed to the control for positioning and velocity controlfunctions.
To move a slide .306 inch, we enter a coded instruction into the control specifying type ofmotion (linear or circular), velocity (feedrate), and distance. (Distance can be indicated as anincremental distance from the current position or as a coordinate which represents the endpointof the move.) Internally, the control decodes the instruction and converts the command into avoltage which is sent to the servo motor of the slide. As the servo motor turns the lead screw,the lead screw turns the encoder shaft and the encoder produces positioning and velocity data.This data is feed back to the control where it is used to monitor slide motion.
The distance from the current slide position to the commanded end point is known as theDistance To Go. Before any slide motion takes place in our example, the distance to go is .306inch. This value is stored in a register in the control. As the lead screw rotates, the controlreceives counts from the encoder and subtracts them from the Distance To Go register.
M-320A 5-1
When the Distance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide hasmoved .30600 (±.00001) inch on CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® lathes. When the Dis-tance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide has moved .3060(±.0001) inch on CONQUEST T42 and T42-L lathes.
This feedback arrangement, in which the actual slide movement is compared with the com-mand originating from the control, is known as a closed loop system. Besides the closed loopsystem for slide position discussed above, there is also a closed loop system for feedrate, whichmakes use of the electrical pulses produced by the encoder.
By making use of the feedback information it receives from the encoder, the control canaccurately move a slide a commanded distance at a commanded feedrate.
X AND Z AXESWe label the axis of motion parallel to the spindle centerline as the Z axis and the axis of
motion parallel to the spindle face as the X axis. Throughout this manual we will refer to theupper carriage as the Z Axis and the cross slide as the X Axis. These letter designations for thetwo axes are recommended by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and the InternationalStandards Organization (ISO). In an effort to promote interchangeability and prevent misunder-standings between NC manufacturers and purchasers, EIA has set forth recommended stand-ards for such things as axis and motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape,operational command and data format, and electrical interface between numerical controls andmachine tools.
This machine tool is available with a secondary Z axis to drive the optional end-working turretor optional ball screw driven sub-spindle. For purposes of CNC control of this axis, the axisdesignation “Y” has been assigned.
RECTANGULAR COORDINATESTo establish a system of relating the position of the tool to a position on the workpiece, we
must first set up a system where we can define the location of a given point relative to a knownreference point. Since we have mutually perpendicular axes (X and Z), we can use rectangularcoordinates (also known as Cartesian coordinates) to describe the location of any point at whichthe tool can be positioned.
There is nothing out of the ordinary about rectangular coordinates. They are used on sucheveryday objects as maps and tickets to sports events. For example, in order to easily identifythe location of a city, a map maker will set up two perpendicular axes. These two axes giveevery city its unique set of coordinates.
Similarly, reserved seats at stadiums are identified as a certain seat in a given row. (Seatsand rows are mutually perpendicular axes.)
To apply the use of rectangular coordinates when programming CONQUEST® T42 serieslathes, it is necessary to define coordinate system reference positions.
5-2 M-320A
COORDINATE SYSTEM REFERENCE POSITIONS
Axis Reference Position
The axis reference position is the location to which the specified axes will move when a G28command is executed. This position never changes. Refer to Chapter 1 for information on pro-gramming the G28 command.
Refer to Appendix One for the axis reference position coordinates.
Machine Zero Position
The intersection of the spindle face and the spindle centerline. This position never changes.
Main Turret Reference Location
The intersection of the turret face toward the spindle centerline and the turret face toward thespindle at the center of the tool slot. This location can be modified through the use of tooloffsets. Refer to Figure 5.1 .
End-Working Turret Reference Location
The intersection of the spindle centerline and the face of the tool bushing in the active posi-tion. This location can be modified through the use of tool offsets. Refer to Figure 5.2 .
Sub-Spindle Reference Location
The intersection of the spindle centerline and the face of the sub-spindle. Refer to Figure 5.3 .
Machine Zero Position
Axis Reference Position
Turret Reference Location
+X
+Z
TI3899
CL
Figure 5.1 - Coordinate System Reference Positions:Main Turret
M-320A 5-3
Machine ZeroPosition
Axis ReferencePosition
Turret ReferenceLocation
+X
+ZTI3901
CL
Figure 5.2 - Coordinate System Reference Positions:End-Working Turret [Option]
Machine Zero Position
Axis Reference PositionSub-Spindle Reference Location
+X
+ZTI3903
CL
Figure 5.3 - Coordinate System Reference Positions:Sub-Spindle [Option]
5-4 M-320A
POSITION REGISTERSPress the Position key; then, press the ALL soft key to view the following position registers on
the control display screen:
AbsoluteDistance to GoMachineRelative
- NOTE -The “Distance To Go” registers are only displayed in Automatic or Manual DataInput mode.
MACHINE POSITION REGISTERS
The Machine Position registers always display the “true” axis position of the turret referencelocation relative to the machine zero position. Active tool offsets and work shift values have noaffect on the Machine Position display.
Refer to Figures 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6 .
ABSOLUTE POSITION REGISTERS
The Absolute Position registers, which can be modified, are probably of greater interest to theprogrammer and operator. To simplify programming, the work coordinate system can be modifiedthrough the use of a work shift and tool offsets to relate the tool nose position to coordinates onthe workpiece.
The work shift offset can be used to move the origin of the work coordinate system asneeded. The work shift is typically used to set the origin (X0. Z0.) to the intersection of thespindle centerline and the face of the workpiece.
The tool offsets can be used to move the turret reference location to the tool nose posi-tion.
Refer to Figures 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6 .
- NOTE -Hardinge recommends that part programs are written using the Safe-Start format,which makes use of the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets. Refer to Chapter 9 forinformation about programming using the Hardinge Safe Start/End programmingformat.
For additional information, refer to “Feedrate”, “Absolute and Incremental Program-ming”, and “Linear Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
M-320A 5-5
TI3900
CL
Machine Zero Position
Turret Reference Location
Tool NosePosition
+Z
+X
Z Axis Machine Position
Z Axis Absolute Position
X AxisAbsolute Position
X AxisMachine Position
Figure 5.4 - Position Display Comparison:Main Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active
TI3902
CL
Machine ZeroPosition Turret Reference
Location
Tool NosePosition
+Z
+X
Y Axis Absolute Position
Y Axis Machine Position
Figure 5.5 - Position Display Comparison:End-Working Turret with Tool Offset and Work Shift Active
5-6 M-320A
TI3904
CL
Machine Zero Position
Tool Nose Position+Z
+X
Z Axis Absolute Position
Z AxisMachinePosition
X AxisAbsolute Position
X AxisMachine Position
TurretReferencePosition
Figure 5.6 - Position Display Comparison:Sub-Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active
M-320A 5-7
- NOTE -
5-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES
CANNED TURNING CYCLE (G90)The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-
ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may beeither a straight turn or a taper turn.
Figure 6.1 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a 1inch long, .5 inch diameter turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1 inch. The face of thepart extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 by theG10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.Turret station #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the program-mer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindlecenterline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machinecoordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tool tip will bepositioned in relation to the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.
Since all dimensions are in inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).
EXAMPLE 1: G90 STRAIGHT TURNING (Figure 6.1)
N10 G20 ; N90 G99 G90 X.875 Z-1. F.02 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N100 X.75 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N110 X.625 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N120 X.532 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N130 X.5 ;N50 T0101 ; N140 G1 ;N60 X1.5 Z.1 ; N150 M98 P1 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N160 M1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N170 M30 ;
2.735
.735 .500 1.000
.500
1.100
1.000
.100STARTPOINT
CLSPINDLE
FACECHUCKFACE TI1600
Figure 6.1 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Straight Turn)
M-320A 6-1
The cutting tool path is a box pattern; and, because the Start Point is also the point to whichthe tool returns on the return path, the Start Point in the X direction was placed at a distancegreater than .5 inches from the spindle centerline. This assures that the tool will completely facethe workpiece shoulder on each pass.
The G90 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 together with G99 (inch/rev feed),the first pass tool tip position relative to the spindle centerline, the length of cut, and the feedrate.In subsequent turning cycle blocks (N100 through N130) it is only necessary to specify the tooltip position relative to the spindle centerline for each pass. Feedrate and spindle speed changescan also be programmed in these blocks. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is active during theturning passes. To deactivate G90 mode, program another Group 1 G-code. (Refer to the Gcode chart located in Appendix Two.)
The approach and return paths are executed at rapid traverse rate. This rate can be variedwith the Rapid Override switch.
If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the parametersMUST be entered prior to the G90 block.
In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z, make certain each com-mand has the correct sign.
EXAMPLE 2: G90 TAPER TURNING (Figure 6.2)
N10 G20 ; N110 X1.5359 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N120 X1.4109 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N130 X1.2859 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N140 X1.1609 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N150 X1.0671 ;N50 T0101 ; N160 X1.0359 ;N60 X2. Z.2 ; N170 G1 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N180 M98 P1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M1 ;N90 G1 G42 X1.76 Z.1 F200. ; N200 M30 ;N100 G99 G90 X1.6609 Z-1. R-.29474 F.004 ;
2.735
.100.735 .500 1.000
1.6609 1.1251.250
1.760
1.035915°
.500
TI2670
START POINT
CLSPINDLE
FACECHUCKFACE
Figure 6.2 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Tapered Turn)
6-2 M-320A
All rules applying to straight turning in the G90 Canned Turning mode also apply to taperturning in this mode.
Figure 6.2 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a 1inch long, 15 degree taper turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1.25 inches. The face ofthe part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 by theG10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The only difference between taper turning and the preceding straight turning is that theamount of taper in the X direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G90block. Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as itmoves in the -Z direction, as in I.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the toolmoves in the +X direction as it moves in the -Z direction, as in O.D. work.
For this example, “R” was determined as follows:
R = (Z + .1) x -(Tan 15 degrees)
= 1.1 x -.26794... (Unrounded Value)
= -.29474 (Rounded Value)
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGHAND FINISH TURNING (G71/G70)
- NOTE -This section is divided into two parts; standard turning and the optional pocketturning feature. All general information on G71/G70 turning is outlined in the sectionon standard turning. Specific information relating to the optional G71/G70 pocketturning feature begins on page 6-8.
The G71 Multiple Repetitive Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability ofdescribing multiple rough turning passes with two blocks of information. The first G71 blockspecifies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract fromthe workpiece for the return pass. The second G71 block specifies the data blocks which definethe section of the workpiece to be rough turned and the amount of stock to be left for finishmachining. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies the section of the workpiece to befinish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of the required program section.
G71/G70 STANDARD TURNING
Figure 6.3 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part that is to be roughturned and finish contoured to the dimensions shown.
The face of the part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 setsthe part face to Z0, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z Axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.Turret station #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the program-mer to program the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindlecenterline and the Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on themachine coordinate system. If a Z Axis Work Shift (G10) is active, the Z Axis position of the tooltip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.
Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures thecorrect format in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21). The StartPoint commanded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by the blank stock.
M-320A 6-3
Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle (Figure 6.3)N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N150 X.55 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 X.8 Z-.4665 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.75 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 X.94 ;N60 X1.31 Z.2 ; N190 X1.1 Z-.83 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 Z-1. ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 X1.3 ;N90 G1 G42 X1.3 Z.1 F100. ; N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M1 ;N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ; N250 M30 ;
TI1602
2.735
.735 .500
1.000
.830
.750
.4665
.250
.100
1.125 W U/2
.100
1.300
1.100
.940
.800.550
U.250
SPINDLEFACE
CHUCKFACE
STARTPOINT
CL
Figure 6.3 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle
6-4 M-320A
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough turning cycle:
N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ;
Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.
U: Depth of cut of each pass (as a radius value) during the roughing cycle. In this examplethe depth of each cutting pass is .100 inches.
R: Distance the tool will withdraw from the part for the return pass.
Block N120 will execute the roughing cycle:
N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.
P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be roughed out.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be roughed out.
U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.This is a diameter value.
W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
F: Feedrate in inches/revolution for the roughing cycle. The decimal point must be pro-grammed.
- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.
Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:
N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;
S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.
Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.
N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;
F: The feedrate for the finishing pass. The decimal point must be programmed.
M-320A 6-5
Block N220 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst (P) and last (Q) blocks of the required program section.
N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;
P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.
- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q datawords.
When the control encounters the G71 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stockas specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in thedirection and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensurethat slide movements occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, thecontrol automatically assumes plus (+). In this example the cross slide will move .015 inches inthe +U direction and the carriage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. The control will thencause the machine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contourpass (as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.3) that follows the contour as designated byblocks N130 through N210. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finish pass will beexecuted according to the program section specified in the G70 block.
The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word inblock N110 (R.025).
In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose RadiusCompensation must be established in a block preceding the G71 roughing cycle block. ToolNose Radius Compensation is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point com-manded in block N90. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle andreactivated after the G71 cycle is completed. After the workpiece has been finish machined, ToolNose Radius Compensation is canceled by the G40 command in sub-program “O1", which iscalled in block N230. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation", Chapter 2.
Constant Surface Speed must be established in blocks preceding the G71 roughing cycle.The feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the first G71 block or in thesecond G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass must be established inthe part program after the second G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishingpass can be changed at will between the starting and ending blocks as designated in the G70block.
The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode isprogrammed in block N30. A G99 Preparatory command, programmed in block N100, estab-lishes Inch per Revolution feedrate. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word andthe G50 Preparatory Command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96command in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle is set by the S word in thesame block. Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for thefinishing pass is established in block N140. Constant Surface Speed is canceled by the G97command in sub-program “O1" after the workpiece has been finish machined. Also see ”Con-stant Surface Speed Programming", in Chapter 9.
6-6 M-320A
G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules
- NOTE -Refer also to page 6-9 for rules when programming G71/G70 pocket turning.
1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain a Z move.
2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on both the Xand Z axes.
4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designatedby P and the end of the cycle designated by Q.
5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q isexecuted.
6. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, it must be programmed prior to thefirst G71 block. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be deactivated during the G71cycle and reactivated after the G71 cycle is completed.
7. If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G71block.
8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G71 block. Tooloffset changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.
9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG71 block or in the second G71 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishingcycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70block.
M-320A 6-7
G71/G70 POCKET TURNING [Option]
- NOTE -This section contains specific information relating to G71/G70 pocket turning. Referto “G71/G70 Standard Turning”, beginning on page 6-3, for more complete informa-tion on programming the G71/G70 turning cycle.
Figure 6.4 and its accompanying program illustrates a pocket contour that is to be roughturned and finish turned to the dimensions shown. Figure 6.5 illustrates the paths followed by theroughing and finishing tools.
The part face is set to Z0; therefore, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle (Figure 6.4)N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.4 W0. S800 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N140 G1 G99 X.75 Z-.125 F.004 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N150 Z-.25 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 X.5 Z-.375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.625 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 X.75 Z-.75 ;N60 X1.1 Z.1 ; N190 Z-.875 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 X1.1 Z-1.05 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;N90 G1 G42 X1.05 Z.05 F100. ; N220 M98 P1 ;N100 G99 ; N230 M1 ;N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M30 ;N120 G71 P130 Q200 U.03 W0 F.01 ;
TI2697
1.050
.875
.750
.625
.375
.250
.125
.050
START POINT
1.100DIA.
.750DIA.
.500DIA.
1.000DIA.
CL
45°
Z0
Figure 6.4 - G71/G70 Pocket Cutting (Sample Part)
6-8 M-320A
- NOTE -When programming G71 pocket turning, the following programming rules super-sede the corresponding standard G71 programming rules, as outlined on page 6-7.All other programming rules outlined under standard G71 turning still apply.
G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules1. The value of the W data word in the second G71 block MUST be zero (W0); otherwise,
the tool tip may cut into one of the side walls of the pocket.
2. When the block specified by the P word in the second G71 block does not contain Z axismotion, a W0 (zero) MUST be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on the Z axisonly.
4. A maximum of ten pockets can be programmed in the G71 turning cycle.
START POINT
TI2698
D
Z0
CL
U
Figure 6.5 - Tool Path For G71/G70 Pocket Cutting(Enlarged View)
M-320A 6-9
CANNED FACING CYCLE (G94)The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-
ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be eitherstraight or taper facing.
Figure 6.6 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part having a diameter of1.5 inches that is to be faced back .5 inches with a .5 inch diameter projection remaining.
Example 5: G94 STRAIGHT FACING (Figure 6.6)
N10 G20 ; N110 Z-.1875 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-1.9 ; N120 Z-.25 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N130 Z-.3125 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N140 Z-.375 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N150 Z-.4375 ;N50 T0101 ; N160 Z-.484 ;N60 X1.6 Z.1 ; N170 Z-.5 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N180 G1 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M98 P1 ;N90 G99 G94 X.5 Z-.0625 F.002 ; N200 M1 ;N100 Z-.125 ; N210 M30 ;
1.900
.100
1.600
.500
1.500
.400
STARTPOINT
SPINDLEFACE TI1603
CHUCKFACE
.500 .500
CL
Figure 6.6 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Straight Facing)
6-10 M-320A
The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.Turret station #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the program-mer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindlecenterline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machinecoordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tool tip will bepositioned in relation to the shifted Z0.
Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures thecorrect format in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21).
The cutting tool path is a box pattern. Since the Start Point is also the point to which the toolreturns on the return path, the starting point in the X direction was placed at a distance greaterthan .75 inches from the spindle centerline. This assures that the cutting tool will completely facethe workpiece shoulder on each pass. In the Z direction, the start point was placed in front of theworkpiece face to ensure that the .5 inch diameter is completely turned on each pass.
The G94 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 along with the depth of cut for thefirst pass (Z) on relation to Z0 (zero) and the diameter to which the facing operation is to extend(X). The feedrate is also specified. In subsequent blocks (N100 through N170) it is only neces-sary to specify the depth of cut for each pass in relation to Z0 (zero). Feedrate and spindlespeed changes can also be programmed in these blocks. The Feedrate 1 Override switch isactive during the facing passes. To deactivate the G94 mode, program another group 1 G code.Refer to the G Code chart in Appendix Two.
- CAUTION -All facing passes MUST be toward the spindle centerline. If the facing opera-tion is programmed to face away from the spindle centerline, the cutting toolwill advance into the workpiece at the rapid traverse rate.
The approach and return paths are executed at the rapid traverse rate. This rate may bevaried with the Rapid Override switch.
If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used, the parameters MUSTbe entered prior to the G94 block.
In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z make certain each com-mand has the correct sign.
M-320A 6-11
Example 6: G94 TAPER FACING (Figure 6.7)
N10 G20 ; N130 Z-.0875 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.025 ; N140 Z-.15 ;N1 (Operator Message) ; N150 Z-.2125 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 Z-.275 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.3375 ;N50 T0101 ; N180 Z-.4 ;N60 X1.75 Z.2 ; N190 Z-.4625 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 Z-.49 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 Z-.5 ;N90 G1 G41 X1.6 Z.1 F200. ; N220 G1 ;N100 G99 G94 X.5 Z.1 R-.14737 F.002 ; N230 M98 P1 ;N110 Z.0375 ; N240 M1 ;N120 Z-.025; N250 M30 ;
All rules applying to straight facing in the G94 Canned Facing cycle also apply to taper facing.
Figure 6.7 illustrates an elementary part with a 1.5 inch diameter. This part is faced back .5inches and leaves a shoulder that tapers back 15 degrees. A .5 inch diameter projection re-mains.
The only difference between taper facing and the preceding straight facing example is that theamount of taper in the Z direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G94block. Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the +X direction as itmoves in the +Z direction, as in I.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if thetool moves in the -X direction as it moves in the +Z direction, as in O.D. work.
For this example, R was determined as follows:
R = (1.05 - x) x (-Tan 15°)= (1.05 - .5) x -.26794... (Unrounded Value)= -.14737 (Rounded Value)
TIA1604
2.025
.100
.14737
1.500
.500
SPINDLEFACE
15o
CLCHUCKFACE
1.600
STARTPOINT
.500.400 .500
.550
Figure 6.7 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Tapered Facing)
6-12 M-320A
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGHAND FINISH FACING (G72/G70)
The G72 Multiple Repetitive Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability ofdescribing multiple rough facing passes with two blocks of information. The first G72 block speci-fies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from theworkpiece for the return pass. The second G72 block specifies the data blocks which define thesection of the workpiece to be rough faced, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining,and the feedrate for the G72 roughing cycle. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifiesthe section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of therequired program section.
Figure 6.8 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part that is to be rough andfinish contoured to the dimensions shown.
N10 G20 ; N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ; N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;N2 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N150 Z-.95235 ;N40 M98 P1 ; N160 X1. Z-.375 ;N50 T0202 ; N170 X.75 ;N60 X4.11 Z0.2 ; N180 Z.1 ;N70 G50 S4000 ; N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;N80 G96 S1000 ; N200 M98 P1 ;N90 G1 G41 X4.1 Z.1 F100. ; N210 M1 ;N100 G99 ; N220 M30 ;N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;
TI1605
2.650
4.100
3.0004.000
1.250
STARTPOINT
.100
1.000
.750
.95235
.400 .500
U30o
W (N110)
W(N120) .375
CLSPINDLE
FACECHUCKFACE
Figure 6.8 - G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle
M-320A 6-13
The face of the part extends 2.650 from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 sets the partface to Z0, all facing passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z axis tool offsets are compensated for through the Tool Offset selection in blockN50. Turret Station #2 is selected and Tool Offset #2 is activated. The Tool Offset allows theprogrammer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to thespindle centerline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on themachine coordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tooltip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.
Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures thecorrect format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.
The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by theblank stock.
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough facing cycle:
N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;
Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.
W: Specifies the depth of cut of each pass during the roughing cycle.
R: Specifies the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece for the return pass.
Block N120 will execute the rough facing cycle:
N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.
P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.
U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.This is a diameter value
W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
F: Feedrate for the roughing passes. The decimal point must be programmed.
Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:
N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;
S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.
6-14 M-320A
Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.
N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;
F: The feedrate for the finishing pass. The decimal point must be programmed.
Block N190 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying thefirst (P) and the last (Q) blocks of the required program section:
N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;
Where: G70 = Preparatory command for the finishing cycle.
P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the work-piece area being finish machined.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the work-piece area being finish machined.
When the control encounters the G72 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stockas specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in thedirection and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensurethat slide movements occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, thecontrol automatically assumes plus (+). In this example, the cross slide will move .015 in the +Udirection and the carriage will move .015 in the +W direction. The control will then cause themachine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contour pass (asshown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.6) that follows the contour as designated by blocks N130through N180. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finish pass will be executedaccording to the program section specified by the G70 block.
The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word inblock N110 (R0.03).
The spindle speed for the roughing passes is specified in block N80. It is recommended thatthe spindle speed be established before the G72 blocks to ensure the spindle reaches full com-manded speed before the roughing passes begin. Spindle speed and feedrate changes for thefinish cycle can be made at will between the starting and ending blocks as designated by P andQ in the G70 block.
Tool changes (T function) for the roughing cycle MUST be made prior to the first G72 block.Tool offset changes for the finishing cycle can be made within the blocks designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.
In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose RadiusCompensation must be established in a block preceding the first G72 block. Tool Nose RadiusCompensation is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point commanded in blockN90. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle and reactivated afterthe G72 cycle is completed. Compensation is canceled by a G40 command in subroutine “O1",which is called by line N200. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation" Chapter 2.
M-320A 6-15
If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be established in blocks preceding the firstG72 block. Feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the G72 blocks or inthe second G72 block. If a different surface speed and feedrate is required for the finishing pass,it must be established in the part program after the second G72 block. Surface speed andfeedrate can be changed at will between the starting and ending block as designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.
The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode isprogrammed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word and the G50Preparatory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96 com-mand in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle by the S word in the same block.
Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Constant Surface Speed iscanceled by the G97 command in sub-program “O1" after the workpiece has been finish ma-chined. Also see ”Constant Surface Speed Programming" in Chapter 9.
The feedrate for the finishing pass is established in block N140.
G72 Programming Notes
1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain an X move.
2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern.
4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designatedby P and the end of the cycle designated by Q.
5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q isexecuted.
6. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, it must be programmed prior to thefirst G72 block. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be deactivated during the G72cycle and reactivated after the G72 cycle is completed.
7. If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G72block.
8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G72 block. Tooloffset changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the Pand Q words.
9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG72 block or in the second G72 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishingcycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words.
6-16 M-320A
AUTOMATIC G73/G70 ROUGH AND FINISH PATTERN REPEATThe G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
repeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour) with two blocks of information. The first block speci-fies the incremental distance between the first and last roughing pass and the number of rough-ing passes to be executed. The second block specifies the section of the workpiece to beroughed out, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining, and the roughing feedrate.Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies the section of the workpiece to be finish ma-chined by specifying the first and last block of the required program section. This automatic cycleis especially useful for rough and finish contouring a workpiece whose rough shape has alreadybeen created by casting, forging or rough machining. If this cycle is to be used to contour aworkpiece from bar stock, make certain the first pass starts at a point that will not cause exces-sive “hogging” on the first pass.
Figure 6.9 illustrates an elementary part that is to be finished to the dimensions shown withthree roughing passes and a finishing pass. It is assumed the configuration of the blank work-piece approximates that of the finish piece.
Sample ProgramN10 G20 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ;N7 (Operator Message) ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ;N40 M98 P1 ;N50 T0707 ;N60 X2.15 Z.2 ;N70 G50 S3000 ;N80 G96 S500 ;N90 G1 G42 X2.05 Z.1 F100. ;N100 G99 ;N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ;N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;N130 G0 X.5 ;N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ;N150 X.75 ;N160 X1. Z-.4665 ;N170 Z-.72 ;N180 X1.5 Z-.97 ;N190 Z-1.25 ;N200 X2.05 ;N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;N240 M30 ;
- NOTE -The legends in lower half of Figure
6.9 are explained as follows:
U1 = U (N110)U2 = U (N120)W1 = W (N110)W2 = W (N120)
TI1606
STARTPOINT
U1 U2
W1
W2
U1 + U2
W1 +W2
STARTPOINT
2.650
2.050
1.250
.500.750
1.0001.500
.100
.250
.4665
.400 .500 .720
.970
2.000 45°30°
SPINDLEFACE
CHUCKFACE
CL
Figure 6.9 - G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern
M-320A 6-17
Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures thecorrect format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.
The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the maximum diameteroccupied by the blank stock to be machined.
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the G73 rough facing cycle:
N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ;
U: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction. (radius value) This value tells thecontrol the amount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the X direction. Thisvalue will allow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull awayfrom the workpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value isequal to the amount of stock to be removed from each side during the roughing cycleminus the depth of the first cut and finish allowance on each side.
Example:
Total amount of stock to remove = .200 (radius value)Depth of first cut = -.050 ”X axis finish amount left = -.015 ”Programmed U word (Block N110) = .135 ”
W: Distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction. This value tells the control theamount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the Z direction. This value willallow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull away from theworkpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value is equal to theamount of stock to be removed during the roughing cycle minus the depth of the first cutand finish allowance.
R: The number of rough passes desired.
- NOTE -The above entries are modal and are not changed until another value is pro-grammed.
Block N120 will execute the G73 rough facing cycle:
N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
P: Sequence number of the first block for the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.
Q: Sequence number of the last block for the program section that controls the workpiecearea being roughed out.
U: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter value).
W: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
F: Feedrate to be active during the automatic roughing cycle. The decimal point must beprogrammed.
Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.
N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ;
F: The feedrate for the finishing pass. The decimal point must be programmed.
6-18 M-320A
G73 Programming Notes
1. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
2. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designatedby P and the end of the cycle designated by Q.
3. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. Thecontrol automatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q isexecuted.
4. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, it must be programmed prior to thefirst G73 block. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be deactivated during the G73cycle and reactivated after the G73 cycle is completed.
5. If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G73block.
6. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G73 block. Tooloffset changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the Pand Q words in the G70 block.
7. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the firstG73 block or in the second G73 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishingcycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70block.
AUTOMATIC FINISHING CYCLE (G70)After rough cutting by G71, G72, or G73, the following command permits finishing.
G70 P(starting block) Q(finishing block) ;
Refer to the sections on the G71, G72, and G73 automatic cycles for G70 programmingexamples.
P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiecearea to be finish machined.
G70 Programming Notes
- CAUTION-Never position the Start Point below the Q Line diameter. When the G70 fin-ish turn is completed, the tool rapids back to the Start Point.
1. F, S and T words programmed between sequence numbers “P___” and “Q___”, as de-fined by the G70 program block will be recognized by the G70 cycle.
2. When the G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle is completed, the tool is returned to the startpoint and the next block is read.
3. In blocks between the starting block and finishing block programmed in G70 throughG73, subprograms cannot be called.
M-320A 6-19
AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLESIn any auto deep hole drilling cycle, the Z axis is reversed at prescribed intervals to provide
for proper chip removal. An automatic drilling cycle must be flexible enough to accommodate awide variety of materials and a full range of hole depths. It is the programmer’s responsibility tomake certain that the programmed parameters result in a cycle that satisfactorily removes chipsduring the drilling operation. If the chip load builds up:
1. The drill bit could break.
2. The spindle could stall.
3. The Z axis servo motor could overload.
CONSTANT DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING CYCLE (G74)
A G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments. Allinformation for the cycle is programmed in two data blocks. The data word formats are defined inthe section below and illustrated in Figure 6.10 .
Block Format
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch Programming
G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±2.4 Q6 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;
Metric Programming
G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±3.3 Q6 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
Inch Programming
G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±2.5 Q7 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;
Metric Programming
G74 R(e) ;G74 Z(W)±3.4 Q7 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;
- NOTE -The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word formats, NOT actualdimensions.
6-20 M-320A
Q Word ProgrammingDecimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word. On CONQUEST® T42 and
T42-L lathes, the control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.4 for English units (inches)and Q3.3 for Metric units (millimeters). On CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® lathes, thecontrol assumes decimal point placement as Q2.5 for English units (inches) and Q3.4 for Metricunits (millimeters). Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zeros MUST be programmed.Refer to the following examples:
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch: Q2500 = .25 inches Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 millimetersQ25000 = 2.50 inches Q25000 = 25.0 millimeters
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathes
Inch: Q25000 = .25 inches Metric: Q25000 = 2.5 millimetersQ250000 = 2.50 inches Q250000 = 25.0 millimeters
Where: G74 = G code for Auto Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)
R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.
Z = Z coordinate of Final Hole Depth (signed)
W = Z Increment from Start Point to Final Depth (signed)
Q = Size of Depth Increment (unsigned)
F = Feedrate.
Before the G74 block is encountered, the drill must be positioned at the start point. Duringexecution of the cycle, the series of Z axis moves (see Figure 6.10) is as follows:
a) From the start point, the drill feeds in “Q” amount.
b) The drill retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.
c) The drill feeds in “Q+R” amount.
d) The drill continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “Q+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in to the final hole depth, then rapid retracts to thestart point.
TI2159
Z-Axis Start Point
+Z
+XQR
Z
W
Figure 6.10 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle Parameters
M-320A 6-21
G74 Auto Drilling Sample ProgramIn this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the face of the part and the final depth of the hole is 1.5
inches. Refer to Figure 6.11 .
Sample ProgramN7 (Operator Message) ; N270 G74 R.05 ;N230 G97 S1000 M13 ; N280 G74 G99 Z-1.5 Q25000 F.005 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N290 M98 P2 ;N250 T0707 ; N300 M1;N260 X0. Z.1 ;
R WORD (N270)
Specifies the amount of retract between each cutting move of the drill bit. Refer to “R”, inFigure 6.10 . In this example, the amount of retract is .05 inches.
F WORD (N280)
Specifies the feedrate for the G74 Auto Drilling Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is.005 inches per revolution.
Q WORD (N280)
Specifies the depth of cut in the Z direction. In this example, the depth of cut is .25inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.
Z WORD (N280)
Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). In this example, thefinal depth of the drilled hole is 1.5 inches.
- NOTE -Instead of programming Z-1.5 in block N280, we could have programmed W-1.6(the incremental distance from the start point to the final hole depth) and the cyclewould have behaved exactly the same way.
TI2160
Start Point(X0. Z.1)
.100
.100.050
1.500
1.600
+X
Figure 6.11 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle(Sample Workpiece)
6-22 M-320A
VARIABLE DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING CYCLE
The G74 Auto Drilling Cycle has limited applications because of its constant infeed, constantretract increments, and absence of a dwell. To create a more versatile automatic drilling cycle,Hardinge Inc. has made use of the Macro B programming feature to develop an auto drillingcycle with variable depth increments, a retract point clear of the part, and a programmable dwellat the retract point.
All information required for this drilling cycle is programmed in one data block.
- NOTE -The values shown in the following data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.
Decimal point programming MUST be used in data blocks containing macro calls.
Block FormatCONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.4 B2.4 F1.6 W2.4 C2.4 A5.1 ;
Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.3 B3.3 F3.4 W3.3 C3.3 A5.1 ;
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
Inch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.5 B2.5 F1.6 W2.5 H1.5 C2.5 A5.1 ;
Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.4 B3.4 F3.4 W3.4 H2.4 C3.4 A5.1 ;
Where: G65 = G Code for Macro CallP9136 = Macro Program 9136 (Deep Drill)
K = Z Axis End Position (SIGNED absolute value)B = Start Feed Increment Value (Incremental value, always positive)F = Drill Feedrate per Revolution
W = Depth of First Drill In-FeedC = Minimum IncrementA = Amount of Dwell (in seconds) at Retract Point
Refer to Figure 6.12 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.
M-320A 6-23
Positioning the DrillThe data block preceding the block calling Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 will position the
drill tip at the start point for the drilling cycle. All retract motion during the drilling cycle will be tothis start point.
Calculating the Drill Pass Increments1. 1st Pass Increment = Specified by the W word.
2. 2nd pass increment = .5 times the 1st pass increment.
3. 3rd pass increment = .5 times the 2nd pass increment.
4. 4th pass increment = .5 times the 3rd pass increment.
The control will not allow the pass increment to drop below the minimum pass increment, asestablished by the C word.
- NOTE -If desired, the value of “W” can be increased or decreased to lengthen or shortenthe first pass depth. This will have a direct affect on the rest of the passes.
TI2163
MIN.INC.
Z START POSITION
RAPID TRAVERSEFEED
Z ENDPOSITION
B
K
1st Pass (W)2nd Pass3rdMIN.INC.
Figure 6.12 - Macro 9136: Deep Drill Cycle Parameters
6-24 M-320A
Example 1 (Refer to Figure 6.13)Deep Drill Macro Program 9136
A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep, is to be drilled in a piece of 1-3/16 inchdiameter stock. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell isprogrammed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and theminimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of the work-piece has been set to Z0 (zero) and the part has already been center drilled. The partprogram block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:
G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;
Sample Program Segment:
.
.N150 M98 P1 ;N160 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..
TI2166
First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.02)
Second Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z.02)
Start Point(X0. Z.1)
.020
.100
.730
1.500
.750
Z0
CL
Figure 6.13 - Macro Program 9136(Without using the optional Z Word)
M-320A 6-25
Optional Z Word
- CAUTION -The Z word is an optional command and is NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED UN-LESS REQUIRED.
Assuming the part face has been set to Z0, a Z word with a negative (-) value may beprogrammed if the drill is to start inside the workpiece; for example, inside a counterbore.
The depth of the counterbore will be programmed in the macro command line as a negativevalue, assuming the face of the workpiece is set to Z0. The drill will rapid into the counterbore adistance equal to the value of the Z word plus the value of the B word. The drill will feed in fromthis position at the programmed feedrate.
Refer to “Example 2", below.
Example 2 (Refer to Figure 6.14)Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 (With a Z Word)
A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep from the face of the workpiece, is to be drilledin a piece of 1-3/16 inch diameter stock. The hole will begin at the base of a .25 inchcounterbore. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell isprogrammed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and theminimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of the work-piece has been set to Z0 (zero) and the bottom of the counterbore has already been centerdrilled. The part program block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:
G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z-.25 ;
TI2174
Start Point(X0. Z.1)
First Rapid-to-FeedPoint (X0. Z-.23)Second Rapid-to-Feed
Point (X0. Z-.98)
.020
.100
.750
1.500
.980
Z0
CL
1.000
.250
Figure 6.14 - Macro Program 9136(Using the optional Z Word)
6-26 M-320A
The only difference between this sample program segment and the sample program segmentin Example 1 is that in this sample the drill bit will rapid from the start point (X0. Z.1) to X0. Z-.23before going to the programmed feedrate.
The coordinate location X0. Z-.23 was determined by adding the Feed Increment Value (Bword) to the value of the programmed Z word.
Sample Program Segment
.
.N150 M98 P1 ;N160 M1 ;N2 (Operator Message) ;N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;N180 M98 P1 ;N190 T0202 ;N200 X0. Z0.1 ;N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z-.25 ;N220 M98 P1 ;N230 M1 ;..
M-320A 6-27
G75 AUTO GROOVING CYCLEAll information for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks, as follows:
BLOCK FORMAT
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L LathesInch Format
G75 R2.4 ;G75 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);
Metric Format
G75 R3.3 ;G75 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision ® LathesInch Format
G75 R2.5 ;G75 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);
Metric Format
G75 R3.4 ;G75 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);
- NOTE -The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word format designations,NOT actual dimensions.
Where: G75 = G code for Auto Grooving Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)
R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.
X = X coordinate at full depth of pass (signed)
U = Incremental distance from X axis start pointto X axis final position (signed)
Z = Z axis position for final pass (signed)
W = Incremental distance from first pass Z axis positionto last pass Z axis position (signed)
P = Size of depth increment (unsigned)
Q = Incremental amount of Z axis move between fullcutting passes (unsigned)
F = Feedrate.
Refer to Figure 6.15 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.
6-28 M-320A
P AND Q WORD PROGRAMMING
Decimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the P or Q data words. The control assumesdecimal point placement as P2.5 and Q2.5 for English units (inches) and P3.4 and Q3.4 forMetric units (millimeters). Leading zeros may be omitted; however trailing zeros MUST be pro-grammed. Refer to the following examples:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch: P2500 = .25 inches Metric: P2500 = 2.5 millimetersP25000 = 2.50 inches P25000 = 25.0 millimeters
Inch: Q2500 = .25 inches Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 millimetersQ25000 = 2.50 inches Q25000 = 25.0 millimeters
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
Inch: P25000 = .25 inches Metric: P25000 = 2.5 millimetersP250000 = 2.50 inches P250000 = 25.0 millimeters
Inch: Q25000 = .25 inches Metric: Q25000 = 2.5 millimetersQ250000 = 2.50 inches Q250000 = 25.0 millimeters
TOOL MOVEMENT SEQUENCE
Before the G75 blocks are encountered, the grooving tool must be positioned at the X and Zaxis start point. During execution of the cycle, the series of X and Z axis moves (Refer to Figure6.15) is as follows:
a) From the start point, the tool feeds in “P” amount.
b) The tool retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.
c) The tool feeds in “P+R” amount.
d) The tool continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “P+R” amount until the lastpass. On the last pass, the tool feeds in a distance equal to or less than “P” until thefinal depth is reached.
e) The tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position.
f) The tool moves toward the Z axis end point a distance specified by the Q word to arriveat the start point for the next full cut.
g) Steps “a” through “f” are repeated until the entire groove is completed.
h) When the final cut is completed, the tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position; thenrapids to the X and Z axis start point specified by the program blocks immediately pre-ceding the G75 blocks.
M-320A 6-29
TI2164
STARTPOINT
X,Z
U
W Z0
CL
U
P
U
R
Q
Z AXISMOVEMENT
CL
CL CL
CL CL
5
1 4
2
3 6
Figure 6.15 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle Parameters
6-30 M-320A
G75 AUTO GROOVING SAMPLE PROGRAM
In this sample program segment, X0 (zero) is the spindle centerline, Z0 (zero) is the face ofthe workpiece and the final depth of the groove is .25 inches. The width of the grooving tool is.125 inches. Refer to Figure 6.16 .
- NOTE -The P word in block N300 is an incremental value. Each cutting pass will be anactual .075 inch cut.
Sample Program SegmentN7 (Operator Message) ; N280 G96 S280N230 G97 M13 ; N290 G75 R.02 ;N240 M98 P1 ; N300 G75 G99 X.5 Z-.8 P07500 Q10000 F.005 ;N250 T0707 ; N310 M98 P1 ;N260 X1.1 Z-.625 ; N320 M1 ;N270 G50 S5200 ;
R WORD (N290)
Specifies the incremental amount of retract between each cutting move of the groovingtool. Refer to “R”, in Figure 6.15 . In this example, the amount of retract is .02 inches.
F WORD (N300)
Specifies the feedrate for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is.005 inches per revolution.
TI2165
1.100 DIA.1.000 DIA.
.500 DIA.
.250.625
.500
.800
START POINT(X1.1 Z-.625)
+Z
+X
CL
Figure 6.16 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle(Sample Workpiece)
M-320A 6-31
P WORD (N300)
Specifies the incremental depth of each cutting move in the X direction. In this example,the depth of each cutting move is .075 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT al-lowed with the P word.
Q WORD (N300)
Specifies the incremental move in the Z direction between each full cutting pass. In thisexample, the incremental move is .100 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT al-lowed with the Q word.
X WORD (N300)
Specifies the X axis position of the tool at the end of each complete cutting pass, inreference to X0 (zero). In this example, the X axis position is X.5 inches.
Z WORD (N300)
Specifies the Z axis position for the final full cutting pass, in reference to Z0 (zero). Inthis example, the final Z axis position is Z-.8 inches.
- NOTE -If the Z values in blocks N260 and N300 are swapped, the tool will begin at Z-.8and finish at Z-.625 .
6-32 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 6-33
- NOTES -
6-34 M-320A
CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLE
INTRODUCTIONThe feedrate for precision threading should be lead limited to 120 inches [3048 mm] per
minute. Above this value, to the maximum machine feedrate, the lead error should be checked tomake certain it does not exceed specifications for the individual thread being produced. It is theprogrammer’s responsibility to ensure that the combination of lead and spindle speed does notexceed a feedrate which produces threads that are not within specifications.
The maximum spindle speed for a given thread lead is calculated through the use of thefollowing formulas:
English Threads: Maximum rpm = 120 inches/minute ÷ Thread Lead
Metric Threads: Maximum rpm = 3048 millimeters/minute ÷ Thread Lead
Refer to the following chart to determine the maximum spindle rpm rating, based on the typeof spindle drive that the machine is equipped with. Refer to Appendix One for power and torquecurves.
Spindle Drive Type* Maximum RPM
10 HP [7.5 Kw] Standard Drive 5000
10 HP [7.5 Kw] High Torque Drive 3000
15 HP [11 Kw] High Speed Drive 6000
15 HP [11 Kw] High Torque Drive 4400
* 30 minute power rating
SINGLE BLOCK THREADCUTTINGCONQUEST® T42 series lathes feature an encoder that is geared to the spindle through a
timing belt. The encoder monitors RPM during a threading pass and when feeding in Inches/mmper Revolution (G99). The encoder sends data relating axis position and velocity to the servodrives.
With the Single Block Threadcutting feature, the programmer can cut a thread in any desirednumber of passes using either the G32 or G92 preparatory command. The principle differencesbetween the two commands are:
1. The G92 command causes the X axis movements of the threading tool to be controlledautomatically by the machine during the threading cycle. The G32 command is used toprogram each threading pass individually.
2. The G92 command requires fewer blocks of information for a complete threading opera-tion.
The feedrate of the carriage and/or cross slide is determined by programming the thread“Lead” using the F word address. The format for F is:
Inch Programming: F1.6
Metric Programming: F3.4
M-320A 7-1
- NOTE -Thread pitch is the axial distance from the center of one thread to the center of thenext. Lead is the distance the screw will advance when turned one revolution. On asingle thread screw, the pitch and lead are equal since a screw will advance anamount equal to the pitch when turned one revolution. On a double thread thescrew will advance two threads or twice the pitch in one revolution. Therefore, theprogrammed lead is twice the pitch.
Program the spindle speed for a threading operation in a block of data preceding the thread-cutting calling block (G32 or G92). This will allow time for the spindle speed to stabilize beforeentering the threadcutting mode.
The Feedrate 1 Override switch is not active during a G32 or G92 threadcutting pass unless itis set to 0%. When the Feedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILL STOP.
The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons are active. Unless the control has the op-tional Thread Cutting Cycle Retract feature, Feed Hold is not active during the threadcuttingpass, but is active on the return pass.
TO ESTABLISH A START POINT FOR THREADING
For accurate thread leads it is essential that the per revolution feedrate of the tool is heldconstant during the threading pass. The location of the start point for each threading pass isimportant in that sufficient distance must be provided to accelerate the tool from its Z axis veloc-ity at the end of the infeed to the proper threading velocity.
Due to the nature of the servo-controlled axis drive system, provide a minimum of four leadsor .250 inch, whichever distance is greater, between the first thread to be cut and the start pointfor the threading pass.
The X axis start point should be equal to the diameter of the workpiece plus two times thesingle depth of thread.
- NOTE -This minimum clearance must be provided for all threading passes. If a compoundinfeed is used, (see “Compound Infeed Threading”, Page 7-8) work backwards tocalculate the start point for the cycle. Beginning with the last threading pass, calcu-late the Z axis motion during infeed for the first pass. Add this distance to the Zaxis clearance (four leads or .250 inch, whichever is greater). This gives the Z axisposition of the start point for the cycle relative to the first thread to be cut.
7-2 M-320A
G32 PROGRAMMINGThe G32 command, which must be programmed in each threadcutting data block, automat-
ically resynchronizes the threadcutting mode so that the same thread is cut in each pass. TheG32 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.
Only one axis need be programmed for a straight thread; both axes must be programmed fora tapered thread. The thread length and lead must be programmed in each G32 block.
Example 1: G32 Straight Threads (Figure 7.1)
For this example it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Zdirection. The spindle centerline is X0. G98 is activated by Safe Start Subprogram O1 in blockN360.
Sample ProgramN7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;N350 G97 S500 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.25 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;N380 X.951 Z.25 S1920 ; N490 X.951 ;N390 G1 X.8559 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.25 ;N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;N410 X.951 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;N420 G0 Z.25 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N550 M1 ;
TI1607
1.000
.875
.0383
LEAD
.250
Z0
12
.7984
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383"
.0625
CL
Figure 7.1 - Sample G32 Straight Threading Program
M-320A 7-3
Example 2: G32 Tapered Threads (Figure 7.2)
When programming tapered threads, movements must be programmed in both the X and Zaxes. The lead is specified by the F word, whose lead orientation (X or Z axis) is determined bythe angle of the taper with the part centerline.
If the angle of taper “B”, Figure 7.2, is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F ismeasured parallel to the Z axis. If angle of the taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measuredparallel to the X axis.
For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread 1.25 inches long turnedon its O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis because the angle of taperis less than 45 degrees.
The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Zdirection. The spindle centerline is X0.
Sample ProgramN7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N450 X1.614 ;N350 G97 S1000 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.2857 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X1.3187 F50. ;N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 X1.4143 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N490 X1.614 ;N390 G1 X1.3758 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.2857 ;N400 G32 X1.4714 Z-1.25 F.071429 ; N510 G1 X1.2901 F50. ;N410 X1.614 ; N520 G32 X1.3857 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;N420 G0 Z.2857 ; N530 X1.614 ;N430 G1 X1.3472 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;N440 G32 X1.4429 Z-1.25 F.071429 ; N550 M1 ;
TI2583
STARTPOINT
1.500
.0478
.0571
LEAD.071429
.2857
1.4044
B
CL1.250
Z0
Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .0571"Angle B = 1° 47’Taper (R) = .0478"
1.614
Figure 7.2 - Sample G32 Taper Threading Program
7-4 M-320A
G92 PROGRAMMINGThe G92 Threadcutting command provides the programmer with the capability to define multi-
ple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass.
The G92 lead and thread length commands are programmed in the first threadcutting datablock only. Only positions in the X (U) axis (thread pass coordinate) need be programmed insubsequent blocks. The G92 command is modal and remains active until canceled by anotherGroup 1 G code.
When cutting a tapered thread, an R word must be programmed in the G92 block.
The following sample programs have been shortened for easier reading.
The sample programs shown were written for a CONQUEST® T42 or T42-L lathe. Refer topage 1-3 for the correct data word format when using a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision®
lathe.
Example 3: G92 Straight Threads (Figure 7.3)
(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
The face of the part extends 3.00 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored inthe Work Shift offset. This causes the face of the part to be set to Z0. All threading passes willbe in the minus Z direction.
The tool nose reference point is 1.25 inches from the turret face in the -X direction and .25inches in the -Z direction. These dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file underoffset 07 as positive values. The offset is activated by the T0707 command in block N370.
Sample ProgramN7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N400 X.8367 ;N350 G97 S500 M13 ; N410 X.8176 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N420 X.7984 ;N370 T0707 ; N430 G0 ;N380 X.951 Z0.25 S1920 ; N440 M98 P1 ;N390 G92 X.8559 Z-1. F.0625 ; N450 M1 ;
TI2582
STARTPOINT
.0383 .7984
.250
RETURN PATH
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383"
CL
1.000
LEAD.0625
.875.951
Z0
Figure 7.3 - Sample G92 Straight Threading Program
M-320A 7-5
Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishesthe return path after the completion of each threading pass.
Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X.8559),thread length (Z-.75) and lead (F.0625). In subsequent blocks, N400 through N420, it is onlynecessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the final depth is reached in blockN420.
- NOTE -A G00 code MUST be on the line after the last threading pass. If the G00 code isnot present, the tool will make two extra passes on the workpiece at the last pro-grammed thread depth.
Example 4: G92 Tapered Threads (Figure 7.4)
(Constant lead on a part having a tapered diameter.)
O.D. tapered threads are programmed as a Negative R word in the G92 block to define theamount of taper. I.D. tapered threads are programmed with Positive R words in the G92 block.
For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start, 1.25 inch long thread turnedon its O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis and R is measured parallelto the X axis because the angle of the taper is less than 45 degrees.
The face of the part extends 2.25 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored inWork Shift offset as Z-2.2500. Storing the part length as a Work Shift offset causes the face ofthe part to be set to Z0. All threadcutting passes will be in the minus Z direction.
Sample ProgramN7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N410 X1.4314 ;N350 G97 S1000 M13 ; N420 X1.4086 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N430 X1.3857 ;N370 T0707 ; N440 G0 ;N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N450 M98 P1 ;N390 G92 X1.4771 Z-1.25 F.071429 R-.0478 ; N460 M1 ;N400 X1.4543 ;
TI2583
STARTPOINT
1.500
.0478
.0571
LEAD.071429
.2857
1.4044
B
CL1.25
Z0
Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .0571"Angle B = 1° 47’Taper (R) = .0478"
1.614
Figure 7.4 - Sample G92 Taper Threading Program
7-6 M-320A
The tool tip is located on the turret centerline and extends 1.25 inches from the turret face.The tool dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset number 07.
Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishesthe return path after completion of each threading pass.
Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X1.4771),thread length (Z-1.25), lead (F.071429), and amount of taper (R-.0478). In subsequent blocks,N400 through N440, it is only necessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the finalthread depth is reached in block N440. Notice that the sign of R must be minus to cause thethreading tool to move in the plus X direction.
See “R Word” in Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76), Page 7-11.
If the angle of taper “B” is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is measuredparallel to the Z axis. If the angle of taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel tothe X axis.
PLUNGE INFEED THREADINGA plunge infeed is used in the threading example shown in Figure 7.1 . During a plunge
infeed, Figure 7.5, the tool moves along the X axis from the start point for the threading cycle tothe start point for the current threading pass. Infeed is at 90 degrees relative to the spindlecenterline. The next block contains the threading G Code (G32) which synchronizes axis motionwith spindle rotation. When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins at the com-manded per revolution feedrate. As illustrated in Figure 7.5, an equal amount of material isremoved by each edge of the tool.
TI1611
STARTPOINT
1234
Figure 7.5 - Plunge Infeed
M-320A 7-7
COMPOUND INFEED THREADINGWhen machining a material that presents threading difficulties due to its toughness or when
cutting a coarse thread of extreme depth, it is often desirable to infeed the tool so that theleading edge of the tool cuts the major portion of the material. This reduces deformation of thetool nose due to pressure and heat, thus adding to the tool life. To accomplish this, the X and Zaxis position of the tool at the start point of each pass is altered to produce the desired infeedangle, as shown in Figure 7.6 . This is known as Compound Infeed.
When using compound infeed, the Z axis start point is shifted by an amount determined bythe X axis shift (∆X) and the desired angle of the compound infeed. In Figure 7.7, the infeedangle, designated θ, is at 25 degrees relative to the face of the part.
The incremental shift in the Z axis start point for each pass (∆Z) is calculated with the follow-ing equation (Refer to Figure 7.7):
∆Z = ∆X x Tan θ
During a compound infeed thread, Figure 7.6, the tool moves on the X axis from threadingcycle start point to the start point for the current threading pass. After the threading pass, the toolmoves along the return path to the next Z axis start position, which is equal to the previous Zaxis start point minus ∆Z.
When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins. With a compound infeed, the Z axisposition of the tool, at the start of each cut, is closer to the part face than it was on the previouspass. The result of this is that the majority of all metal removal takes place along the leadingedge of the tool with the trailing edge making a slight clean-up cut.
TIA1612
Thread Cycle Start Point
First Pass
Second Pass
Third Pass
Fourth Pass
Tool Return Path
Figure 7.6 - Compound Infeed
7-8 M-320A
Figure 7.7 illustrates how the incremental shift in the Z start position for the compound infeedis calculated for each threading pass.
Where:
X1 = X Axis Position for the 1st Pass.X2 = X Axis Position for the 2nd Pass.X3 = X Axis Position for the 3rd Pass.X4 = X Axis Position for the 4th Pass.θ = Infeed AngleZ1 = Initial Z Axis Start Point
Z2 = Z1 - ∆Z
Z3 = X2 - ∆Z
Z4 = Z3 - ∆Z
TIA1613
θ
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
X1
X2
X3
X4
CL
∆ X
∆ Z
Figure 7.7 - Z Start Position for Compound Infeed
M-320A 7-9
The following program segment has been taken from Example 1 and modified to incorporatecompound infeed (Refer to Figure 7.1):
N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;N350 G97 S1920 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.2411 ;N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;N380 X.951 Z.25 ; N490 X.951 ;N390 G1 X.8559 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.2366 ;N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;N410 X.951 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;N420 G0 Z.2455 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N550 M1 ;
CALCULATIONS
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383 (Radius Value)
Number of Threading Passes = 4
θ (Infeed Angle)= 25°
Incremental Change in Depth per Pass (∆X) = .009575 (Radius Value).01915 (Diameter Value)
Incremental Change in Z (∆Z) = ∆X (Radius Value) x Tan 25°= .009575 x .46631= .004465
Coordinate Values for each Threading PassX1 = .875 - .01915 = .85585X2 = .85585 - .01915 = .83670X3 = .83670 - .01915 = .81755X4 = .81755 - .01915 = .79840
Z1 = .25000Z2 = Z1 - .004465 = .24554Z3 = X2 - .004465 = .24107Z4 = Z3 - .004465 = .23661
7-10 M-320A
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREADING CYCLE (G76)The G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
defining a complete threading operation with two blocks of information. The control interprets thedata in these two blocks and generates the multiple passes required to cut an entire thread.
This automatic threading cycle can be used for cutting straight or tapered threads of constantlead in either Absolute or Incremental mode. The thread may be either external or internal.Plunge (X axis) or compound (X and Z axis) infeed can be performed.
Specification of the threading cycle parameters is achieved by using the G76 preparatorycommand and its associated parameters as follows:
BLOCK FORMAT
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch Programming:
G76 P6 Q4 R0.4 ;G76 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 R±1.4 P4 Q4 F1.6 ;
Metric Programming:
G76 P6 Q3 R1.3 ;G76 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 R±2.3 P3 Q3 F3.4 ;
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision ® Lathes
Inch Programming:
G76 P6 Q5 R0.5 ;G76 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 R±1.5 P5 Q5 F1.6 ;
Metric Programming:
G76 P6 Q4 R1.4 ;G76 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 R±2.4 P4 Q4 F3.4 ;
- NOTE -Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P or Q wordsin a G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle.
With leading zero suppression, the decimal point is not programmed. Leading zeros can beomitted, but all trailing zeros must be programmed.
Example:
The format for the P word in the execution line on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precisionlathe is P5 for Inch mode and P4 for metric mode.
The format for the Q word in the execution line on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precisionlathe is Q5 for Inch mode and Q4 for metric mode.
The numbers indicate the number of places to the right of the assumed decimal point.
The control counts from right to left, inserts the decimal point the number of places fromthe right as set by the format. Leading zeros will be automatically inserted when required.
M-320A 7-11
EXAMPLE 5: G76 STRAIGHT THREADS (Figure 7.8)
(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and isready to have a .125 lead, single start thread, 1.75 inches long cut on its O.D. The thread is tobe cut in ten passes on a CONQUEST® T42 Lathe.
Sample Program for Figure 7.8
N4 (T0404 1.5 - 8 THREAD) ;N200 G97 S500 M13 ;N210 M98 P1 ;N220 T0404 ;N230 X1.6534 Z.5 S960 ;N240 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;N250 G76 X1.3466 Z-1.75 P0767 Q0242 F.125 ;N260 M98 P1 ;N270 M1 ;
TI2580
STARTPOINT
X1.6534 Z.500
X1.3466Z-1.75 Q Word
.0242
P Word.0767F.125
CL1.50
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0767
Z0
Figure 7.8 - Sample G76 Straight Threading Program
7-12 M-320A
EXAMPLE 6: G76 TAPERED THREADS (Figure 7.9)
(Constant lead on a tapered part)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1° 47′ taper andis ready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread, 1.25 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
N9 (T0909 1.5 - 14 Taper Thread) ;
N100 G97 S1000 M13 ;
N110 M98 P1 ;
N120 T0909 ;
N130 X1.614 Z.2857 S1100 ;
N140 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;
N150 G76 X1.3857 Z-1.25 P0571 Q0120 R-.0478 F.071429 ;
N160 M98 P1 ;
N170 M1 ;
TI2581
START POINT
F
ZSTART
R
X
PQ
CL
TOOL TIPANGLE
ANGLE “B”
Angle “B” = 1° 47’
Thread Lead “F” = .071429
Single Depth of Tapered Thread “P” = .8 x Lead = .0571
First Pass Depth = .012
O.D. = 1.750
Length of Thread = 1.25
Start Point Coordinates = X = 1.614
Z = .2857
Note: All Dimensions are in Inches.
Z
Figure 7.9 - Sample G76 Tapered Thread Program
M-320A 7-13
G76 PARAMETERS (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)
P Word (First G76 Block)
The number of finishing passes is specified by parameter 723 and has a valid range from1 to 99. This parameter is set by the first two digits in the P word located in the first line ofthe G76 programming blocks.
The thread chamfer (anticipated pullout) amount is specified by parameter 109 and has avalid range from 00 to 99. This range allows the programmer to specify a chamfer amountfrom 0.0 times the thread lead to 9.9 times the thread lead. This parameter is set by thesecond two digits in the P word located in the first line of the G76 programming blocks. Asetting of 00 will pull straight out of the part. A setting of 10 will have an anticipated pulloutof one lead.
The tool nose angle is specified by parameter 724 and can be set to 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or80 degrees. This parameter is set by the last two digits in the P word located in the firstline of the G76 programming blocks. A 0 setting will give a plunge feed.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P word.
The P word in the first G76 block has a data word format of P6 .
Q Word (First G76 Block)
Parameter 725 specifies the minimum depth of cut for a threading pass and is set by thisdata word.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.
The Q word in the first G76 block has the following data word format:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe Q4 Q3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Q5 Q4
R Word (First G76 Block)
Parameter 726 specifies the finish pass allowance per side and is set by this data word.For the examples shown in Figures 7.8 and 7.9, R.0004 will leave .0004 inches per sidefor the clean-up pass.
7-14 M-320A
G76 EXECUTION LINE
P Word (Second G76 Block)
Specifies the single depth of the thread and is always positive. It is measured parallel tothe X axis. The P Word value for an American National Thread is calculated as follows:
Single Depth of Thread = .61343 ÷ Number of Threads per Inch
See Figure 7.8 for its definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9 when cuttinga tapered thread.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.
The P word in the second G76 block has the following data word format:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe P4 P3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe P5 P4
Q Word (Second G76 Block)
Specifies the cutting depth of the first pass and is always positive. It is measured parallelto the X axis.
See Figure 7.8, for its definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9, when cuttinga tapered thread. This value is calculated by dividing the Single Depth of Thread by thesquare root of the number of threading passes to be taken.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word.
The Q word in the second G76 block has the following data word format:
LatheModel
Data Word Formats
Inch Mode (G20)Metric Mode
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe Q4 Q3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe Q5 Q4
F Word (Second G76 Block)
Specifies the thread lead and is always positive. It is measured parallel to the Z axis forstraight threads. It is measured parallel to the Z axis for tapered threads when the angle ofthe workpiece centerline is equal to or less than, 45 degrees. If the angle of taper with theworkpiece centerline is greater than 45 degrees, it is measured parallel to the X axis.
M-320A 7-15
X Word (Second G76 Block)
For a straight external thread the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter of the thread.For a straight internal thread the X word specifies the O.D. (Major Diameter) of the thread.When cutting tapered threads, the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter at the largeend of the external thread or O.D. (Major) diameter at the small end for an internal thread.The sign will be positive for cutting on the back side of the spindle centerline (+X).
Z Word (Second G76 Block)
In Absolute programming mode the Z word specifies the Absolute Z coordinate at the endof the thread. Unless the face of the part has been set to Z Zero by a Work Shift offset, Zwill be relative to the spindle face. When a Work Shift is used, Z will be relative to the faceof the part. The sign of Z will be positive when measured from the spindle face andnegative when measured from the face of the part.
R Word (Second G76 Block)
The R word is only programmed when tapered threads are to be produced. When it isprogrammed, the R word must be in the second G76 block.
The R word specifies the amount of taper in a tapered thread and is measured parallel tothe X axis. It is calculated as follows:
R = W * TAN B(* = Multiplication)(B = Angle of taper with workpiece centerline)
The R word may be programmed as R0 (zero) or omitted when cutting a straight thread.When cutting a tapered thread, length W must include the additional travel required for thestart point on the Z axis. When cutting a tapered thread in the +X direction, as shown inthe example, R must have a NEGATIVE (-) value. If the minus sign is not used, R isassumed to be positive and the taper will be cut in the -X direction or opposite the direc-tion shown. The same rule applies to internal threads cut on the +X side of the spindlecenterline. A conventional pipe thread would require a NEGATIVE “R” for O.D. threadingand a POSITIVE “R” value for I.D. threading.
G76 PROGRAMMING NOTES
1. After the initial pass, the control automatically calculates the depth of cut based on aconstant volume removal of material. The minimum cutting depth is controlled by pa-rameter 725. This parameter is controlled by the Q word in the first G76 block.
2. During the return path the control defaults to rapid traverse. If a slower rate is desireduse the Rapid Override switch.
3. For precision threadcutting, the feedrate should be lead limited to 120 inches per minute.
4. The number of clean-up passes is set by parameter 723. This parameter is controlled bythe first two digits in the P word in the first G76 block. As shipped from Hardinge Broth-ers, Inc., this parameter is set at 1. It may be set from 1 to 99 passes.
5. The Reset button is active during the threading pass. The Feedrate 1 Override switch isdisabled during a G76 Automatic Threading Cycle unless it is set to 0%. When theFeedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion will stop.
7-16 M-320A
VARIABLE LEAD THREADCUTTING [Option]The Variable Lead Threadcutting feature enables the programmer to cut straight or tapered
threads having linear increasing or decreasing leads. The G34 code is used to prepare thecontrol for cutting leads of either type.
The length of thread is determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. Only one axisneed be programmed for a linear thread; both axes must be programmed for a tapered thread.
The initial thread lead is determined by programming an F word. For tapered threads, F ismeasured parallel to the Z axis when the angle of taper with the workpiece centerline is equal toor less than 45 degrees. When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel tothe X axis.
The rate at which the thread lead increases or decreases is programmed as a K word. This isthe linear increase or decrease per revolution - not the change in lead per inch. It is calculatedfrom the formula:
K = [Final Lead2 - Initial Lead2] ÷ [2 x Thread Length]
- NOTE -When solving the preceding formula for threads with decreasing lead, the value ofK will be negative. The minus sign must be programmed for a thread with decreas-ing lead or the control will assume plus and cut a thread with increasing lead.
The maximum spindle speed that can be programmed when cutting variable lead threads isdetermined by the maximum lead from the formula:
Maximum rpm = 120 ipm ÷ Maximum Lead
When cutting a thread with decreasing lead, if the K word is large enough to decrease thethread lead to zero before the end of the thread is reached, the control will go into a Cycle Stopand alarm message #14 will be displayed on the control display screen.
The Feedrate 1 Override switch is not active during a threadcutting pass.
The G34 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.
The data words have the following format:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch Programming: X(U)±2.4, Z(W)±2.4, F1.6, K±1.6
Metric Programming: X(U)±3.3, Z(W)±3.3, F3.4, K±3.4
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
Inch Programming: X(U)±2.5, Z(W)±2.5, F1.6, K±1.6
Metric Programming: X(U)±3.4, Z(W)±3.4, F3.4, K±3.4
- NOTE -The optional Threadcutting Cycle Retract feature is NOT active during G34 VariableLead Threadcutting.
M-320A 7-17
TAPPINGUse a self-releasing style tap holder with sufficient longitudinal float to allow the spindle to
reverse direction. The Hardinge Model TT-5/8 and TT-3/4 tap holders have a pullout to releaseincrement of 3/32 inch, which is sufficient.
1. Program a dwell to allow the spindle to reach the programmed speed before the toolengages the workpiece.
Minimum Dwell = (Previous Spindle Speed - Tapping Spindle Speed) ÷ 1000
2. Use the G32 Preparatory Command.
3. Program the lead command F.001 inch (.0254 mm) per revolution less than the threadlead where practical.
4. Minimum dwell for holder release is determined as follows:
Minimum Dwell = (Tap Pullout) (60)(Lead) (rpm)
5. Reverse spindle and feed out at lead (F), a distance Z that is sufficient to clear theworkpiece.
EXAMPLE
Tap a 1/4-20 thread, 1/2 inch deep using a Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder.
Previous spindle speed was 1500 rpm.Spindle speed is 250 RPM.Minimum dwell (step 1) for spindle speed change is determined as follows:
Dwell = (1500 - 250) ÷ 1000 = 1.25 seconds
Minimum dwell (step 4) for Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder is determined as follows:
Dwell = (.094) (60)= .45 sec.(.05) (250)
(Rounded to nearest tenth of a second equals .5).
7-18 M-320A
SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT
- CAUTION -During set up, the operator must activate AUTO mode before line 190 is readby the control. SINGLE mode (block-by-block) execution should not be usedfor spindle reversal (M04). Tap breakage or thread damage will occur. It issuggested that the operator activate AUTO mode after completion of line 150.
Assume that the part length has been stored as a Work Zero Offset and that tool offsetdimensions have been stored in Tool Offset (Geometry) file.
- NOTE -Hole was drilled to a depth greater than the depth of the tapped thread.
Operator Message ⇒ N5 (T0505 1/4-20 Tap) ;Spindle Forward 250 RPM, Coolant ON ⇒ N120 G97 S250 M13 ;Call Safe Start/End Program O1 ⇒ N130 M98 P1 ;Select Tool and Tool Offset ⇒ N140 T0505 ;Approach ⇒ N150 X0. Z0.5 ;Dwell for 1.25 Sec. for Spindle Speed Change N160 G4 X1.25 ;Tap ⇒ N170 G32 Z-0.5 F0.049 ;Dwell .5 Sec. ⇒ N180 G4 X0.5 ;Spindle Reverse, Coolant ON ⇒ N190 M14 ;Clear Workpiece by .50 Inch ⇒ N200 G32 Z0.5 F0.05;Call Safe Start/End Program O1 ⇒ N210 M98 P1 ;Optional Stop ⇒ N220 M1 ;
LEFT-HAND THREADSIf left-hand threads are to be cut from right to left (-Z direction, tool path toward the spindle
face), the spindle must be run in the reverse (M04) direction. This will require the tool to bemounted cut side up on the turret top plate.
If left-hand threads are to be cut from left to right (+Z direction, tool path toward the part face),the spindle must be running in the forward (M03) direction. This will require the threading tool tipto be mounted upside down on the turret top plate. When this method is used, a relief of .25inches [6.35 mm] or four times the thread lead, whichever is greater, is required to ensure thatlead error does not occur. This clearance is necessary to allow the CNC control to synchronizespindle and axis motion and also to prevent ringing of the first thread.
M-320A 7-19
- NOTES -
7-20 M-320A
CHAPTER 8 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTIONThe Blueprint Programming feature allows the programmer to define the part contour by speci-
fying the end point values along with the desired angle. The intersection points of the straightlines are input as coordinate values or a coordinate value and an angle.
Straight lines can be directly connected to form sharp, chamfered, or rounded corners. It isonly necessary to specify the size of the chamfer or corner radius and the CNC control performsthe required calculations. The respective end point coordinates can be programmed using abso-lute or incremental positioning data.
Linear Interpolation (G01) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.
ANGLE DEFINITION
- NOTE -A comma must precede an A (angle) command.
Angles are defined by referencing the part contour to a zero reference angle. Refer to Figure8.1 . The data word format for angle definition (A Words) is 3.4 . The decimal point MUST beprogrammed.
Minimum Input Value: .0001 degrees
Maximum Input Value: 359.9999 degrees
TI1692
Z Axis
Positive
Negative
180°0°
+90°
-90°
0°
0°
30°
30°
A30.
A-30.
180°
180°
Workpiece
Workpiece
Figure 8.1 - Angle Definition
M-320A 8-1
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLESEight basic examples of blueprint programming are illustrated in Figures 8.2 through 8.17 .
The lines of programming which accompany each of these examples illustrate the programmingformat used for blueprint programming.
These basic examples may be combined to form a wide variety of programming variations.
- NOTE -The numerical values shown in the following examples are not coordinate values.They serve only as part of the coordinate designation to help distinguish betweenthe various “X”, “Z”, “,A”, “,C”, and “,R” values.
Example 1: TWO POINTS(Refer to Figures 8.2 and 8.3)
N____ X2 ,A____ ;orN____ Z2 ,A____ ;
This basic two point definition allows the programmer to specify a linear move by either pro-gramming an X and an A word or programming a Z and an A word.
The CNC control moves the tool nose reference point from the start point at the prescribedangle until the appropriate position register is equal to the programmed coordinate value.
TI1836
X1, Z1(Start Point)
+X
+Z
(End Point)X2, Z2
A
Figure 8.2 - Linear Move Between TwoPoints
TI1836
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.28°
Z-.687
X2.Z?
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.687 ;X2. ,A28. ;
Figure 8.3 - Sample Program Segment
8-2 M-320A
Example 2: THREE POINTS(Refer to Figures 8.4 and 8.5)
N____ ,A1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
This basic three point definition allows the programmer to specify two consecutive linearmoves.
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle.
The second linear move is programmed with an X, Z, and an A word (A2). The X and Z valuesspecify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle of the secondlinear move in relation to the zero reference angle.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves. The tool nose reference point is moved fromthe start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the calculatedintersection point. The control then moves the tool nose reference point from the calculatedintersection point to the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.
TI1837
X1, Z1(Start Point)
X2, Z2
(End Point)X3, Z3
+X
+Z
A2
A1
Figure 8.4 - Linear Moves Between ThreePoints
TI1837
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.Z-.6
X? Z?
X2. Z-1.8
20°
43°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.6 ;,A20. ;X2. Z-1.8 ,A43. ;
Figure 8.5 - Sample Program Segment
M-320A 8-3
Example 3: THREE POINTS WITH A RADIUS(Refer to Figures 8.6 and 8.7)
This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed endpoints for the second linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the toolnose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and performs alinear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.
TI1838
X1, Z1(Start Point)
X2, Z2
X3, Z3(End Point)
A1
A2
+X
+Z
R
Figure 8.6 - Radius Inserted Between TwoLinear Moves
TI1838
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.Z-.5
X? Z?
X2.4 Z-1.8
.1R
25°
60°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A25. ,R.1 ;X2.4 Z-1.8 ,A60. ;
Figure 8.7 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
8-4 M-320A
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies theangle of the first straight line move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) isprogrammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Zcoordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies theangle.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle untilthe tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3, and A2.
Example 4: THREE POINTS WITH A CHAMFER(Refer to Figure 8.8 and 8.9)
This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed endpoints along with an angle definition for the second linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves thetool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3
coordinates.
M-320A 8-5
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Zcoordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies theangle.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle untilthe tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamferand then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3,and A2.
TI1839
X1, Z1(Start Point)
X2, Z2
(End Point)X3, Z3
A1
A2
+X
+ZC
Figure 8.8 - Chamfer Inserted BetweenTwo Linear Moves
TI1839
+X
+Z
18°
65°
X.4 Z0.Z-.5
X? Z?
X2.3 Z-1.9
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A18. ,C.125 ;X2.3 Z-1.9 ,A65. ;
.125
Figure 8.9 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
8-6 M-320A
Example 5: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO RADII(Refer to Figures 8.10 and 8.11)
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linearmoves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and endpoint data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R2) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the startpoint, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nosereference point reaches the point where the first radius is to begin. The control moves the toolnose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second programmedradius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by theZ4 coordinate.
TI1840
X1, Z1 (Start Point)
X2, Z2
X3, Z3
(End Point)
A1
A2
+X
+Z
R1
R2
Z4
Figure 8.10 - Two Radii Inserted BetweenLinear Moves
TI1840
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.X? Z?
X2.25 Z-1.8
Z-.5
Z-2.3
.2R
.4R
20°
60°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,R.2 ;X2.25 Z-1.8 ,A60. ,R.4 ;Z-2.3 ;
Figure 8.11 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-7
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R2 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R2) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until thetool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves thetool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second programmedradius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by theZ4 coordinate.
8-8 M-320A
Example 6: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO CHAMFERS(Refer to Figures 8.12 and 8.13)
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming areillustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linearmoves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and endpoint data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1;N____ X3 Z3 ,C2;N____ X4 Z4;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the X4 and Z4 data words. The X and Z coordinatevalues specify the end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from thestart point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the toolnose reference point reaches the point where the first chamfer is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and then performsa linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The control moves thetool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer and then performsa linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4 coordinates.
TI1841
X1, Z1 (Start Point)
X2, Z2
X3, Z3
(EndPoint)
A1
A2
+X
+ZC1
C2
X4, Z4
Figure 8.12 - Chamfers Inserted BetweenLinear Moves
TI1841
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.Z-.5
X? Z?
X2.3 Z-1.75X2.4Z-2.2
.07
.156
20°
63°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A20. ,C.07 ;X2.3 Z-1.75 ,A63. ,C.156 ;X2.4 Z-2.2 ;
Figure 8.13 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-9
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C2 ;N____ X4 Z4 ;
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angleuntil the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4
coordinates.
8-10 M-320A
Example 7: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE RADIUS AND CHAMFER(Refer to Figures 8.14 and 8.15)
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radiusautomatically inserted at the first intersection point and a chamfer automatically inserted at thesecond intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The firstmethod uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses anangle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,and a programmed end point for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed radius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point ismoved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designatedX2Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs alinear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
TI1842
X1, Z1 (Start Point)
X2, Z2
X3, Z3
A1
A2
+X
+Z
R
C
Z4(EndPoint)
Figure 8.14 - Radius and ChamferInserted Between Moves
TI1842
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.Z-.5
X? Z?
X2.5 Z-2.03Z-2.5
.2
.25R
22°
60°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A22. ,R.25 ;X2.5 Z-2.03 ,A60. ,C.2 ;Z-2.5 ;
Figure 8.15 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-11
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C1 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in the samedata block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedradius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribedangle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and thenperforms a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control movesthe tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs alinear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
8-12 M-320A
Example 8: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE CHAMFER AND RADIUS(Refer to Figures 8.16 and 8.17)
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamferautomatically inserted at the first intersection point and a radius automatically inserted at thesecond intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The firstmethod uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses anangle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,and a programmed end point for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data wordsspecify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is pro-grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R1) is programmed inthe same data block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point ismoved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designatedX2Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
TI1843
X1, Z1 (Start Point)
X2, Z2
X3, Z3
(End Point)
A1
A2
+X
+Z
R
C
Z4
Figure 8.16 - Chamfer and RadiusInserted Between Moves
TI1843
+X
+Z
X.4 Z0.Z-.5
X? Z?
X2. Z-1.5Z-2.1
.25R
.0917°
56°
X.4 Z0. ;Z-.5 ;,A17. ,C.09 ;X2. Z-1.5 ,A56. ,R.25 ;Z-2.1 ;
Figure 8.17 - Sample Program Segment(Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-13
METHOD #2:N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R1 ;N____ Z4 ;
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle ofthe first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed inthe same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the secondlinear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same datablock as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifiesthe end point of the third linear move.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmedchamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribedangle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. Thecontrol moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer andthen performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The controlmoves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then per-forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
8-14 M-320A
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING SAMPLE PROGRAMThis sample program is written using the original method for defining angles. Refer to “Defin-
ing Angles”, Page 8-1.
N1 (Finish Face and Turn R.015 Q3) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle Forward 1000 RPM/Coolant ON
M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1
T0101 ; Index to Station 1 and Select Tool Offset 1
X-0.031 Z0.2 ; Move Tool to Activate Tool Offset
G50 S4000 ; Constant Surface Speed 4000 RPM Limit
G96 S370 ; Establish Constant Surface Speed, 370 Surface Feet per Minute
G1 G42 X-0.03 Z.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 Z0. F.004 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1. ,R0.06 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Insert a .06 Radius
Z-0.25 ,C0.0625 ; Cut to Z-.25, Insert a .0625 Chamfer
X0.5 ,A230. ,R0.125 ; Cut to a .5 inch diameter at an angle of 230 degrees,Insert a .125 Radius
,A180. ,R.125 ; Cut at 180 degree angle, Insert a .125 radius
X1. Z-1.375 ,A130. ,C0.0625 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Cut to Z-1.375, Cut at an angleof 130 degrees, Insert a .0625 Chamfer
Z-1.625 ; Cut to Z-1.625
X1.09 ; Clear workpiece by three times the tool nose diameter.
M98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1
M01 ; Optional Stop
TI1774
.0625 Chamfer .0625 Chamfer
.125 Radius .125 Radius
.06 Radius
1.625
1.0001.000
.500
.250 .250
50° 50°
Figure 8.18 - Finished Workpiece for Sample Program
M-320A 8-15
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING NOTES1. A comma must precede an A (angle), C (chamfer) or R (radius) command.
2. When a chamfer in inserted, the chamfer will be equal on both sides of the lines inter-sected.
3. When a radius in inserted, the radius must be tangentially blended between the twomoves. If a non-tangential radius is required, program the radius using a G02/G03 code.
4. When programming either an insert chamfer or radius, the intersection point must beprogrammed.
5. The value of the chamfer or radius is always positive and it is to be programmed at theend of the first linear move.
6. When defining angles, the decimal point MUST be programmed.
7. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are exe-cuted.
8-16 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 8-17
- NOTES -
8-18 M-320A
CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEEDConstant Surface Speed programming provides the capability of programming the speed of
the workpiece with respect to the tool tip directly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20)or surface meters per minute in metric mode (G21).
Constant Surface Speed programming is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-grammed constant surface speed (S word). Constant Surface Speed mode is selected by theG96 command and is canceled by G97. The G97 command is the start-up mode and selects thedirect RPM mode, which allows direct RPM programming of the spindle speed.
Before programming a G96 command, a block containing a G50 command and an S word toestablish the maximum RPM limit for the following Constant Surface Speed operation MUST beprogrammed. The format for the S word is S4 . As the distance between the tool tip and thespindle centerline varies during a Constant Surface Speed operation, the variable spindle speedis compared to this maximum RPM limit. If the limit is reached, the control will continue executionof the part program at the spindle speed limit.
- CAUTION -When establishing the Constant Surface Speed spindle RPM limit, do not pro-gram any other data words in the same block with the G50 command and theS word.
In Constant Surface Speed mode, the constant surface speed command to the spindle is alsoprogrammed as an S word. The format is S4 in inch mode (G20) and S3 in metric mode (G21).The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute inmetric mode (G21).
A feedrate must also be programmed. The control will then automatically adjust the spindlespeed within its range to maintain a constant surface speed as the cutting radius of the work-piece varies. Since the feedrate is held constant while the spindle speed varies, it is recom-mended that the feedrate be programmed in Inches per Revolution (G99). This will preventoverloading the tool in case a fast feedrate is active when the spindle speed is decreasing (aswhen facing from the center outward).
Figure 9.1 illustrates an elementary part that uses Constant Surface Speed programming. Forthis example, it is assumed that the part has already been roughed out and is ready to be finishcontoured.
Since all dimensions are in inches, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correctformat in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).
The face of the part extends 2.93 inches from the face of the spindle. The part face is set to ZZero by the G10 command in block N20. All turning passes will, therefore, be in the NEGATIVEZ direction. X Zero is at the spindle centerline.
The tool tip extends 1.25 inches from the turret reference point in the X direction and 2.25inches from the turret reference point in the Z direction. These dimensions will be compensatedfor by the tool offsets activated in block N50.
M-320A 9-1
A maximum spindle speed of 4000 RPM for the operation is established in block N70.
Block N80 establishes Constant Surface Speed mode and a surface speed of 500 surfacefeet per minute.
The Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) is established in block N90 along with a feedrate of.007 inches per revolution.
Sample Program:N10 G20 ;N20 G10 P0 Z-2.90 ;N7 (Operator Message) ;N30 G97 S1000 M13 ;N40 M98 P1 ;N50 T0707 ;N60 X1.14 Z.1 ;N70 G50 S4000 ;N80 G96 S500 ;N90 G1 G99 Z0. F.007 ;N100 X0. ;N110 X1. ;N120 X2. Z-.5 ;N130 Z-.7 ;N140 X3. Z-1.2 ;N150 Z-1.5 ;N160 X4.1 ;N170 M98 P1 ;N180 M1 ;N190 M30 ;
A spindle speed MUST be active when entering Constant Surface Speed mode or a CycleStop condition will be created when the first block following the Constant Surface Speed com-mand is encountered.
The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Rapid Over-ride switch are active in Constant Surface Speed mode.
2.90
.40 .50 1.25
1.50
.75
.50 .030 (FACE OFF)
4.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
TI2444
CLSPINDLE
FACECHUCKFACE
Figure 9.1 - Constant Surface Speed Example
9-2 M-320A
SUBPROGRAMSThe subprogram feature provides the main part program with the capability of calling fre-
quently repeated patterns from memory, and executing them a specified number of times. Thesubprogram is called from a special block in the main part program. The subprogram must be inmemory, when called.
Subprogram Format:
O____; Subprogram NameN____; Program BlockN____; .N____; .N____; .M99; Return to calling program
Subprograms stored in memory must be identified by the letter “O” followed by programnumber in the first data block. See “Program Number”, Page 1-6.
The last data block of the subprogram MUST contain an M99 command. This commandshould be in a block by itself.
Subprograms may be stored from the Manual Data Input keyboard, from a separate tape orfloppy disk, or from the tape or floppy disk containing the main part program.
MANUAL DATA INPUT KEYBOARD ENTRY
The method for entering subprograms from the Manual Data Input keyboard is the same asfor main part programs. Be sure that the first data block contains the subprogram number in thecorrect format and that the subprogram ends with an M99 command.
1. Press the Edit push button.
2. Turn the Program Protect key OFF.
3. Press the Program key.
4. Key in the letter “O” and the subprogram number and press the Insert key.
5. Press the EOB (;) key and press the Insert key.
- NOTE -Up to 34 characters can be entered into the data input buffer before the Insert keymust be pressed.
6. Enter each data block, followed by an End of Block (;) character. Press the Insert key toinput the data.
7. After the entire subprogram has been entered, press the Reset key.
8. Turn the Program Protect key ON.
TAPE OR FLOPPY DISK ENTRY
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 Operator’s Manual (M-321) for information on entering subpro-grams into memory from a tape or diskette.
M-320A 9-3
SUBPROGRAM CALL
Subprograms are activated by a special “call” block in the main part program which must havethe following format:
M98 Paaabbbb ;
Where: M98 is the miscellaneous command to activate the subprogram call function.P is the letter address used to specify the number of times the subprogram is to beperformed and the subprogram number.
“aaa” specifies the number of times the subprogram is to be performed. The subpro-gram may be performed up to 999 times. IF NO VALUE IS ENTERED, THE SUB-PROGRAM IS PERFORMED ONCE.
“bbbb” specifies number of the subprogram to be executed.
Sample Program Line #1:M98 P50100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed five times.)
Sample Program Line #2:M98 P100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed one time.)
Sample Program Line #3:M98 P9990100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed 999 times.)
- NOTE -When the subprogram is to be executed just once, use the format shown in sampleprogram line #2. As shown, leading zeros may be omitted from the subprogramnumber when this format is used.
9-4 M-320A
SAFE START SUBPROGRAMSAt the heart of the Hardinge structured programming format are the safe start subprograms.
These subprograms are used to reactivate start-up modes, for example; positioning mode, deac-tivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, establish in/min [mm/min] feed, and move the turret tothe safe index position.
The subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O1 ; SAFE START & O.D. END SUBPROGRAM
N1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation andRPM Limit, IPM Feed.
N2 M98 P999 ; Call Subprogram: Safe Index
N3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program
O2 ; SAFE I.D. END SUBPROGRAM
N1 G00 G97 G98 Z.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, Z Pullback, IPM Feed.
N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
N3 M98 P999 ; Call Subprogram: Safe Index
N4 M99 ; Return to Calling Program
O999 ; SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM
N1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station
N2 X_____ Z_____ ; X and Z Safe Index Position
N3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program
- CAUTION -If the machine is to be run in metric mode, the Z entry (pullback) in subpro-gram O2 MUST be converted to a metric value.
Safe start subprograms 1 and 2 are to be loaded permanently into the control memory. Theyare designed for machine safety and to help simplify programming. Subprogram 999 is used todeactivate the tool offset and command the safe index coordinates desired for the job.
The X safe index value should be equal to the X axis Machine Home position. Refer toAppendix One for information on the X axis Machine Home position.
The Z safe index value should be equal to the LONGEST TOOL on the turret PLUS 1 INCH.
O1 Safe Start & O.D. End Subprogram
The command “M98 P1" is used at the start of every operation and at the end of everyO.D. operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that the turret is in asafe position before indexing.
O2 Safe I.D. End Subprogram
The command “M98 P2" is used at the end of every I.D. operation. This sets the proper Gcodes and returns the turret to a safe position before indexing.
O999
The X and Z safe index coordinates to be used by subprograms O1 and O2.
M-320A 9-5
HARDINGE PERMANENT MACRO PROGRAMSHardinge permanent macro programs are assigned 9000 series program numbers. These per-
manent macro programs cannot be edited. As with other macro programs, the permanent mac-ros are called as follows:
G65 Pxxxx y ;
Where:
G65 = Macro call commandP = Required format letter
xxxx = Macro program numbery = Macro variable(s), if required; = End of Block character
MACRO 9112: SAFE TOOL OFFSET
- CAUTION -This macro program resets ALL tool offset registers. Any tool offsets alreadyentered will be lost.
- NOTE -Macro 9112 is designed to work on machines set for DIAMETER operation ONLY.
This macro must be executed from a program. Otherwise, an indefinite loop is produced andthe control will hang itself up executing the cycle indefinitely. It is recommended that the follow-ing program be loaded into the control memory, to be executed as needed:
Sample Program: O8999 :G65 P9112 ;M30 ;
G65 P9112 is interpreted as follows:
G65 = Macro call commandP = Required format letter
9112 = Macro program number; = End of Block character
To ensure safe machine operation, this macro program has been developed to reset themachine coordinate system offsets in the following manner:
1. All Tool Wear Offset registers are set to zero.
2. All R (Radius) and T (Quadrant) Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to zero.
3. All X Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 8.5000 (English mode) or 215.900 (Metricmode).
4. All Z Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 9.0000 (English mode) or 228.600 (Metricmode).
MACRO 9136: DEEP HOLE DRILLING
An explanation of Macro 9136 is presented in Chapter 6, “Machining Cycles”.
9-6 M-320A
TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING
TAILSTOCK TRAVERSE RATES
There are two rates of tailstock motion:
1. The rapid traverse rate, which is approximately 300 in/min [7620 mm/min].
2. The adjustable feedrate, which is set by the machine operator.
TAILSTOCK POSITIONING
M84 - Tailstock Forward
M84 commands the tailstock to move in the -Z direction to the forward position. The machineoperator establishes the forward position by locating the rapid-to-feed limit switch dog asneeded. The tailstock will move toward the forward position at rapid traverse rate until the rapid-to-feed limit switch is contacted. At that point, the tailstock will feed against the workpiece at afeedrate set by the machine operator.
M85 - Tailstock Retract
M85 commands the tailstock to move in the +Z direction at the rapid traverse rate to the firsthome position encountered.
M86 - Tailstock Home
M86 commands the tailstock to move in the +Z direction to the home position at the rapidtraverse rate. The tailstock home position is referenced from the spindle face and is NOT adjust-able. Refer to Appendix One for illustrations showing the tailstock travel limits.
On CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® machines the tailstock home positionis approximately 17.50 inches [444.5 mm] from the spindle face.
On CONQUEST T42-L machines the tailstock home position is approximately 27.50inches [698.5 mm] from the spindle face.
TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING RECOMMENDATIONS
Hardinge makes the following recommendations in regard to programming tailstock motionand positioning:
1. DO NOT program tailstock M codes in part programs that do not require tailstock sup-port. For maximum safety, the operator’s manual for CONQUEST® T42 series machines(M-321A) instructs the machine operator to deactivate the tailstock feature when runningpart programs that do not require the tailstock.
2. Program an M85 (Tailstock Retract) or M86 (Tailstock Home) at the beginning of everypart program that requires the use of the tailstock to be sure that the tailstock is in a safeand known position. The M85 or M86 command should be programmed in a block byitself immediately before the first block containing an operator message.
3. Program an M84 (Tailstock Forward) at the beginning of each tool operation that re-quires the tailstock to ensure that the tailstock is positioned against the workpiece. Pro-grammed tailstock motion may be stopped by the machine operator for a variety ofreasons. Therefore, the tailstock may not always be positioned where the programmerassumes it will be at the beginning of an operation.
M-320A 9-7
ENGLISH/METRIC MODEOne of the Setting pages is used to establish whether the GE Fanuc 18T control is to power-
up and operate in English mode or Metric mode. This section outlines the procedure for selectingthe desired operating mode.
Through the use of the G20 (Inch Mode) and G21 (Metric Mode) commands, it is possible tooperate in either mode regardless of which mode has been selected on the Setting page. How-ever, the use of these two G codes will not automatically adjust the position registers to displaythe position values in the proper units (inches vs millimeters).
- CAUTION -Part programs should usually be written in the same format as selected onthe Setting page. Programs not written in the same format as established onthe Setting page MUST contain the appropriate English/Metric G code,G20/G21 respectively. When required, this G code must be programmed byitself in the first data block.
- NOTE -When the operating mode is changed through the Setting page, the work shift andtool offsets are automatically changed to the appropriate units.
ESTABLISHING ENGLISH/METRIC MODE
1. Press the Offset Setting key.
2. Press the Setting soft key.
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the Input Unitfield.
4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Input Unit field.
5. Press Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the appropriate number (0:MM 1:INCH).
7. Press the Input key.
8. Press the Control OFF push button.
9. Wait a few seconds; then, press the Control ON push button. The machine will power upin the desired operating mode.
9-8 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 9-9
- NOTES -
9-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT [Option]
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The basic concept of Tool Life Management is that after a specific number of parts or aspecific amount of machining time, the control will automatically begin using another tool in placeof the current tool being used for a particular operation.
Tools are assigned to specific groups, as designated by the programmer. The control willmonitor the measurement value assigned to each tool group and automatically switch to the nexttool in the group when the counter for that tool group reaches the measurement value specifiedby the programmer.
TOOL LIFE MEASUREMENT UNITS
Tool life can be measured using one of the two following methods:
1. Number of parts (machined by the tool)
2. Amount of machining time (on the tool)
Only one of these methods may be used at a time. “Number of parts” will be the activemeasurement unit when the machine is shipped from the factory. Refer to “Determining theMeasurement Unit”, page 10-5, for information on verifying or switching the active measurementunit.
An alarm message will be displayed when any tool group has reached its programmed tool lifeand an “M30" (End of Program) is read by the control. At that point, the machine operator willreplace the tooling and reset the counter relating to the affected tool group. Refer to ”Resetting aTool Group Counter", page 10-6.
Number of Parts
When this type of measurement is used, the control will increment the tool group counter forthe active tool each time the tool group is called by the part program.
Amount of Machining Time
When this type of measurement is used, the control will run the tool group counter for thecurrent tool whenever G01, G02, or G03 is active.
M-320A 10 - 1
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
When using Tool Life Management, tools and offsets are assigned to specific groups. Thesegroups are established by the programmer through the use of a Tool Life Management program,which is independent of the part program. The Tool Life Management program will define theparameters required for Tool Life Management.
The Tool Life Management program defines the following parameters:
1. Group numbers.
2. Tool life value for each group.
3. Tool stations and offsets for each group.
- CAUTION -When the Tool Life Management program is executed, all Tool Life Manage-ment counters will be reset to 0 (zero).
When using Tool Life Management, the machine operator MUST load and execute the ToolLife Management program BEFORE executing the part program for the first time.
Refer to “Programming”, beginning on page 10-7, for information on the Tool Life Manage-ment program and how to incorporate Tool Life Management information in the part program.
BAR FEED OPERATION
There are no special considerations for running bar jobs. When running a bar job and usingTool Life Management, the programmer will program an M30 at the end of the part program andthe machine operator will activate Repeat mode to cause the part program to loop.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information onRepeat mode.
10 - 2 M-320A
OPERATION
- NOTE -Refer also to “General Information”, beginning on page 10-1.
DETERMINING MAXIMUM GROUPS AND GROUP SIZES
The maximum number of tool groups and maximum number of tools per group are establishedby parameter 6800, bits 0 and 1. Be sure that bits 0 and 1 are set to appropriate values to allowfor the necessary number of tool groups and tools per group to be programmed in the Tool LifeManagement Program. Refer to “Tool Life Management Program”, beginning on page 10-7, formore information on the Tool Life Management Program.
The bits in parameter 6800 are numbered as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set bits 0 and 1 according to the following chart:
Bit 1 Bit 0 Max No. of Groups Max Tools per Group
0 0 16 16
0 1 32 8
1 0 64 4
When the machine is shipped from the factory, the maximum number of groups and maximumtools per group will be set to 16.
To Verify Maximum Groups and Group Sizes
1. Press the System key.
2. Press the Parameter soft key.
3. Use the Page keys to display the page that contains parameter 6800.
4. Compare bits 0 and 1 to chart above to determine the maximum groups and groupsizes.
To Set Maximum Groups and Group Sizes
1. Press the Offset Setting key.
2. Press the Setting soft key.
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the ParameterWrite field.
4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Parameter Write field.
5. Press the Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the number 1 (one).
M-320A 10 - 3
7. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be enabled.
8. Press the System function key.
9. Press the Parameter soft key.
10. Use the Page and Cursor keys to position the cursor at parameter 6800.
11. Record the current number in parameter 6800.
12. Key in the entire parameter value with bits 0 and 1 set to the appropriate values.
13. Press the Input key.
14. Press the Offset Setting key.
15. Press the Setting soft key.
16. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Parameter Write field.
17. Key in the number 0 (zero).
18. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be disabled.
10 - 4 M-320A
DETERMINING THE MEASUREMENT UNIT
The two types of measurement units available are “Number of Parts” and “Amount of Machin-ing Time”. To verify which measurement unit is active, it is necessary to view parameter 6800, bit2. To switch the type of measurement unit to be used with Tool Life Management, it is necessaryto modify parameter 6800, bit 2.
The bits in parameter 6800 are numbered as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To Verify the Measurement Unit
1. Press the System function key.
2. Press the Parameter soft key.
3. Use the Page keys to display the page that contains parameter 6800.
If parameter 6800, bit 2 is set to 0, “Number of Parts” is active.If parameter 6800, bit 2 is set to 1, “Amount of Machining Time” is active.
To Switch the Measurement Unit
1. Press the Offset Setting function key.
2. Press the Setting soft key.
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the ParameterWrite field.
4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Parameter Write field.
5. Press the Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the number 1 (one).
7. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be enabled.
8. Press the System key.
9. Press the Parameter soft key.
10. Use the Page and Cursor keys to position the cursor at parameter 6800.
11. Record the current number in parameter 6800.
12. Key in the entire parameter value with bit 2 set to the appropriate value.
13. Press the Input key.
14. Press the Offset Setting key.
15. Press the Setting soft key.
16. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Parameter Write field.
17. Key in the number 0 (zero).
18. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be disabled.
M-320A 10 - 5
RESETTING A TOOL GROUP COUNTER
Resetting the control or turning the control OFF will have NO AFFECT on the tool groupcounters. When all of the tools in a tool group have reached the tool life specified in the Tool LifeManagement program and an M30 “End of Program” is read, the following alarm message willbe displayed:
1503 TOOL GROUP LIFE END
The expired tool groups will be listed near the bottom of the Tool Life Management screen onthe control display screen. The control can display more than one tool group number at a time,when applicable. Resetting the counter for the expired tool group(s) will clear the alarm and allowmachine operation.
- NOTE -It is not necessary to change machine modes to reset tool group counters.
Use the following procedure to reset the tool group counter(s):
1. Press the Offset Setting function key.
2. Press the right-hand soft key.
3. Press the Tool Life soft key.
- NOTE -Each time a cursor control key is pressed, the cursor will move to the next toolgroup in the corresponding direction.
4. Use the cursor control keys to move the cursor to the desired tool group.
5. Using the data input keys, enter -9999 and press the Input key. The tool group counterat the cursor position will be reset to 0 (zero).
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to reset additional tool group counters, as needed.
10 - 6 M-320A
PROGRAMMING
- NOTE -M30 must be programmed for “End of Program” when using Tool Life Management.Do not program M02 for “End of Program”.
Refer also to “General Information”, beginning on page 10-1.
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
Program Format
O _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ G10 L3 ;
Define Tool Group 1 N _ _ P1 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;
Define Tool Group 2 N _ _ P2 L _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;N _ _ T _ _ _ _ ;
Define Tool Group 3 N _ _ P3 L _ _ ;..N _ _ G11 ;N _ _ M30 ;
Data Word Definitions
O _ _ _ _ = Program NumberN _ _ = Block NumberG10 = Begin Tool Data InputL3 = Memory Location for Tool Life Management Data (DO NOT ALTER)P _ _ = Tool Group NumberL _ _ _ _ = Tool Life Value Data WordT _ _ _ _ = Turret Station and Offset NumberG11 = End Tool Data InputM30 = End of Program
M-320A 10 - 7
P Word - Tool Group Number
The P word is used to specify the group number to be assigned to each group of tooling. Thenumerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point programming is notallowed.
Examples: P1 (Tool Group 1)P12 (Tool Group 12)
Refer to “Determining Maximum Groups and Group Sizes”, beginning on page 10-3, for infor-mation on verifying or setting the maximum number of tool groups allowed.
L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word
The L word is used to specify tool life for each tool group in the Tool Life Managementprogram. The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point pro-gramming is not allowed.
Examples: L25 (Tool life equals 25)L200 (Tool Life equals 200)
The following chart shows the minimum and maximum values that may be used with the Lword when programming Tool Life Management.
Measurement Unit Minimum Value Maximum Value
Number of Parts 1 9999
Machining Time (minutes) 1 4300
Refer to “Determining the Measurement Unit”, beginning on page 10-5, for information onverifying or setting the measurement unit to be used.
T Word - Turret Station and Offset Number
The standard T word format is used when defining turret stations and tool offsets in the ToolLife Management program.
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on defining turret stations and tool offsets.
10 - 8 M-320A
Sample Tool Life Management Program
In this sample program we will assume that the measurement unit is set to “Number of Parts”.Refer to “Determining the Measurement Unit”, beginning on page 10-5, for information on verify-ing or switching the active measurement unit.
O7500 ;N1 (Operator Message) ;N10 G10 L3 ;
Define Tool Group 1 N20 P1 L10 ;N30 T0101 ;N40 T0212 ;N50 T0313 ;
Define Tool Group 2 N60 P2 L3 ;N70 T0303 ;N80 T0131 ;
Define Tool Group 3 N90 P3 L30 ;N100 T0919 ;N110 G11 ;N120 M30 ;
DATA BLOCK DEFINITIONS
Block N1 contains an operator message.
Block N10 contains the “Begin Tool Data Input” command (G10) and the memory loca-tion (L3) where the data will be stored.
Block N20 contains the number of the first tool group (Group 1) and the measurementvalue for each group 1 tool (value = 10).
Blocks N30 through N50 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools as-signed to group 1.
Block N60 contains the number of the second tool group (Group 2) and the measure-ment value for each group 2 tool (value = 3).
Blocks N70 and N80 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools assignedto group 2.
Block N90 contains the number of the third tool group (Group 3) and the measurementvalue for each group 3 tool (value = 30).
Block N100 contains the turret station and tool offset data for the tool assigned to group3.
Block N110 contains the “End Tool Data Input” command (G11).
Block N120 contains the “End of Program” command (M30).
M-320A 10 - 9
PART PROGRAM
Tool Commands
Tool stations and offsets were assigned to tool groups in the Tool Life Management program.Refer to “Tool Life Management Program”, beginning on page 10-7. The tool groups are calledfrom the part program using the T word. The data word format for the T word is T4 . Decimalpoint programming is not allowed.
ACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP
T_ _99 T Word Format (99 activates the specified tool group)T0199 Activate Tool Group 1T1299 Activate Tool Group 12
DEACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP
T_ _88 T Word Format (88 deactivates the specified tool group)T0188 Deactivate Tool Group 1T1288 Deactivate Tool Group 12
Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management
O1278 ;G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric modeN _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator MessageN _ _ G97 S1000 M13 ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ONN _ _ M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start SubprogramN _ _ T0199 ; Activate Tool Group 1N _ _ X _ Z _ ; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ T0188 ; Deactivate Tool Group 1N _ _ M98 P1 or P2 ; Call: Safe O.D or I.D. End SubprogramN _ _ M01 ; Option StopN _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator MessageN _ _ G97 S1000 M13 ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ONN _ _ M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start SubprogramN _ _ T0299 ; Activate Tool Group 2N _ _ X _ Z _ ; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ T0288 ; Deactivate Tool Group 2N _ _ M98 P1 or P2 ; Call: Safe O.D or I.D. End SubprogramN _ _ M01 ; Option Stop..N _ _ M30 ; End of Program
10 - 10 M-320A
Combining Tool Commands
Some tools may be expected to last the full life of a particular job. In this case it would bedesirable to program the individual tool in the part program, rather than go to the trouble ofassigning the tool to a tool group and defining the tool group life high enough to run for the fulllife of the job.
It is possible to combine standard tool commands and Tool Life Management commands inthe same part program. Standard tool commands may be programmed in operations that pre-cede or follow operations using Tool Life Management commands. The only restriction is that theactive tool or tool group must be canceled before another tool or tool group can be called.
Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands
O1278 ;G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric modeN _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator MessageN _ _ G97 S1000 M13 ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ONN _ _ M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start SubprogramN _ _ T0101 ; Index to Turret Station 1 and Call Offset 1N _ _ X _ Z _ ; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ M98 P1 or P2 ; Call: Safe O.D or I.D. End SubprogramN _ _ M01 ; Option StopN _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator MessageN _ _ G97 S1000 M13 ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ONN _ _ M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start SubprogramN _ _ T0199 ; Activate Tool Group 1N _ _ X _ Z _ ; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ T0188 ; Deactivate Tool Group 1N _ _ M98 P1 or P2 ; Call: Safe O.D or I.D. End SubprogramN _ _ M01 ; Option Stop..N _ _ M30 ; End of Program
PROGRAMMING NOTES
1. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P or L data words.
2. The same turret station and/or tool offset may be assigned to more than one tool group.
3. Turret stations may NOT be assigned to the same tool group more than once, regard-less of the tool offset to be used.
M-320A 10 - 11
- NOTES -
10 - 12 M-320A
CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING [Option]
- NOTE -This chapter is intended for programming live tooling on machines NOT equippedwith the C Axis option. Refer to Chapter 12 for information on programming livetooling with the C Axis option.
Programming the live tooling is accomplished by means of five special M codes and a B wordin addition to the M codes used for standard machining.
Live tooling is designed to perform machining such as milling, drilling, and tapping on work-piece locations not parallel or not in line with the spindle centerline.
Live tooling attachments are to be mounted ONLY on odd numbered turret stations. Validturret station assignments during live tooling operations on machines equipped with a twelvestation turret top plate are 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11. Valid turret station assignments during livetooling operations on machines equipped with a ten station turret top plate are 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9.
LIVE TOOLING M CODESThe live tooling M codes command rotational direction and control whether coolant is ON or
OFF. An S word must be programmed with the M word to indicate the live tooling spindle speed.This S word has a data word format of S4, with a maximum spindle speed of 4000 rpm. Axismotion may also be programmed in this data block.
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF
M51 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the forward directionwith the coolant turned OFF.
M51 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse directionwith the coolant turned OFF.
M51 cancels M52, M53, M54 and M55.
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF
M52 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse directionwith the coolant turned OFF.
M52 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the forward directionwith the coolant turned OFF.
M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55.
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON
M53 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the forward directionwith the coolant turned ON.
M53 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse directionwith the coolant turned ON.
M53 cancels M51, M52, M54, and M55.
M-320A 11-1
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON
M54 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse directionwith the coolant turned ON.
M54 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the forward directionwith the coolant turned ON.
M54 cancels M51, M52, M53, and M55.
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF
M55 causes the live tooling to stop rotating and turns the coolant OFF.
M55 cancels M51, M52, M53, and M54.
DETERMINING ROTATIONAL DIRECTION
Live Tooling spindle direction can be best described in terms of a drill bit or tap. Right-handdrill bits and taps require a spindle forward command to machine the workpiece. Left-hand drillbits and taps require a spindle reverse command to machine the workpiece.
B WORD - SPINDLE ORIENT COMMANDOne degree and 2½ degree spindle orient are included as standard features on machines
equipped with the live tooling option. With this feature, the spindle can be oriented in one degreeor 2½ degree increments from 0 degrees to 359 degrees. The one degree spindle orient featurecommands the spindle brake to hold the spindle in position. The significance of the 2½ degreespindle orient feature is that the spindle will be mechanically locked in position when oriented toany angle that is a multiple of 2½ degrees.
- CAUTION -Be sure no tooling is touching the workpiece when spindle orient (B word),M51, M52, M53, or M54 is executed.
The B word commands the control to orient the spindle in relation to the spindle 0 degreemark and should be programmed immediately before the live tooling commands. When needed,the B word may be programmed without a live tooling command following it. The data wordformat is B3.1 with a valid range of 0 to 359 in increments of one degree or 2½ degrees.
Examples: B20 orients the spindle at 20 degreesB39 orients the spindle at 39 degreesB219 orients the spindle at 219 degrees
- NOTE -The control interprets 0 degrees and 360 degrees to be the same location.
DETERMINING SPINDLE ORIENTATION
The spindle is oriented to 0 degrees when the spindle drive button is located 45 degrees fromthe machine bed and the spindle key is located 90 degrees from the machine bed, as shown inFigure 11.1 .
11-2 M-320A
DIRECTION OF ORIENTATION
When spindle orient is commanded when the spindle is NOT in motion, the control rotates thespindle to the programmed angle.
When spindle orient is commanded while the spindle is in motion, the spindle will decelerateand orient to the programmed angle. Unless spindle motion (M03, M04, M13, or M14) is com-manded or the Reset key is pressed, subsequent orient commands will cause the spindle to go“shortest path” to arrive at the commanded angle.
After an M03, M04, M13, or M14 has been commanded or the Reset key has been pressed,the next spindle orient command read by the control will not go “shortest path” to arrive at thecommanded angle.
PROGRAMMING SPINDLE ORIENT
The B word can be programmed with or without a decimal point. The decimal point is notrequired unless a digit is to be programmed to the right of the decimal point. The only values thatmay be programmed to the right of the decimal point are “0" or ”5". When a “5" is programmedto the right of the decimal point, the angle being defined MUST be a multiple of 2½ degrees.
Legal Command: B35 (Spindle will be oriented to 35 degrees)Legal Command: B17.5 (Spindle will be oriented to 17.5 degrees)Illegal Command: B17.2 (“2" is an invalid value)Illegal Command: B18.5 (Not a multiple of 2½ degrees)
The control always indexes the spindle to the absolute angle programmed. That is, it is notpossible to incrementally orient the spindle from any angle other than 0 degrees.
Spindle Orient Sample Program Blocks:
N____ B20 ; Spindle oriented to 20°
N____ ; Machining Block
N____ B40 ; Spindle oriented to 40°
N____ ; Machining Block
N____ B60 ; Spindle oriented to 60°
Activating the live tooling with a M51, M52,M53, or M54 command automatically stops thespindle, even if spindle orient (B word) is not pro-grammed. In this case, the spindle will stop at arandom angle.
TI1777
Spindle Key
RotationM03
90°Machine Bed
45°
Main Spindle
Floor
Spindle Drive Button
45°
Turret Top Plate
Figure 11.1 - Spindle Orient ZeroReference Position
M-320A 11-3
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING FORMATBeginning Of Operation:
N___ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageM98 P1 ; Call the Safe Start SubprogramT____ ; Index to Station and Activate Tool OffsetX____ Z____ B____ ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Orient SpindleG97 S____ M53 (or) M54 ; Cutter rpm, Rotational Direction, and Coolant ONG1 X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Position Tool at Start Point
Machining The Part:
Machine the Part (Inches per Minute Feedrate)
Reorient Spindle, if Required:
X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Move the Tool to a Clear AreaB____ ; Orient the Spindle
End of Operation:
X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Move the Tool to a Clear AreaM98 P1 ; Call the Safe End ProgramM01 ; Optional Stop
DEACTIVATING LIVE TOOLING
- CAUTION -Be sure the live tooling is not touching the workpiece when the spindle isreactivated.
There are two methods for deactivating the live tooling:
1. Programming an M55 will deactivate live tooling and coolant. If coolant is required, besure to reactivate coolant with an M08, M13, or M14 when standard machining is re-sumed.
2. Programming a spindle command with a spindle speed will reactivate the spindle andautomatically deactivate live tooling if M51, M52, M53, or M54 is not programmed in thesame data block. In this case it is not necessary to program an M55 command.
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING NOTES1. Move to enter the tool offset in G00 (rapid) mode. A G01 MUST be programmed on the
next move for inch per minute feedrate.
2. Spindle orient is programmed in absolute degrees from the spindle 0 degree mark.
3. Programming spindle rotation will cancel live tooling commands.
4. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Hardinge Safe Start subprograms.
11-4 M-320A
SAMPLE LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMTurret Tooling Operation Sequence
Station 1 7/8 End Mill . . . . . . 3 Flats (1/8" Depth)Station 3 #4 Center Drill . . . . 3 Holes (1/4" Depth)Station 5 #7 Drill . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (9/16" Depth)Station 7 1/4-20 Tap . . . . . . 3 Holes (7/16" Depth)
Sample Program:% Stop CodeO1135 ; Letter “O” and Program No.G20 ; Inch ModeN1 (T0101 7/8 END MILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message(PROGRAMMED TO TOOL CENTER LINE) ; Operator MessageM98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Program OneT0101 ; Index to Turret Station #1, Delay OffsetX1.25 Z1. B0 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.G97 S2500 M53 ; 2500 rpm, Forward/Coolant ONG1 Z.5 F50. ; Tool Center to .5 from Part FaceZ-1.1625 F3. ; Mill IN at 3 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveZ.5 ; Z Axis to Start PointX1.25 B120 ; X Axis To Start Point, Orient Spindle to 120 Deg.Z-1.1625 F3. ; Mill IN at 3 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveZ.5 ; Z Axis to Start PointX1.25 B240 ; X Axis to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.Z-1.1625 F3. ; Mill IN at 3 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveZ.5 ; Z Axis Clear MoveM98 P1 ; Call: Safe End Program OneM01 ; Optional Stop
TI2026
1.50 Dia.
#4 Center Drill, .25 Deep#7 Drill, 9/16 Deep1/4-20 UNC Tap, 7/16 Deep3 Places 120° Apart
2.50
1.60 Typ.
.80Typ. 1.25 Typ.
7/16 Radius Typ.
3 Places, 120° Apart
90°
Figure 11.2 - Sample Live Tooling Workpiece
M-320A 11-5
N3 (T0303 #4 CENTER DRILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and MessageM98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Program OneT0303 ; Index to Turret Station #3, Delay OffsetX1.6 Z.25 B240 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.G97 S2000 M53 ; 2000 rpm, Forward/Coolant ONG1 Z-.8 F50. ; Tool to Z Start PointX.75 F4. ; Cut at 4 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveB0 ; Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.X.75 F4. ; Cut at 4 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveB120 ; Orient Spindle to 120 Deg.X.75 F4. ; Cut at 4 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveM98 P1 ; Call: Safe End Program OneM01 ; Optional Stop
N5 (T0505 #7 DRILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and MessageM98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Program OneT0505 ; Index to Turret Station #5, Delay OffsetX1.6 Z.25 B120 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 120 Deg.G97 S1500 M53 ; 1500 rpm, Forward/Coolant ONG1 Z-.8 F50. ; Tool to Z Start PointX.125 F2. ; Cut at 2 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveB240 ; Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.X.125 F2. ; Cut at 2 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveB0 ; Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.X.125 F2. ; Cut at 2 ipmX1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear MoveM98 P1 ; Call: Safe End Program OneM01 ; Optional Stop
N7 (T0707 1/4-20 TAP) ; “N” Sequence No. and MessageM98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Program OneT0707 ; Index to Turret Station #7, Delay OffsetX1.7 Z.25 B0 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.G97 S500 M53 ; 500 rpm, Forward/Coolant ONG1 Z-.8 F50. ; Tool to Z Start PointX.375 F24.9 ; Tap IN rpmM54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse, Tap OUTM53 ; Forward rpmB120 ; Orient Spindle to 120 Deg.X.375 F24.9 ; Tap INM54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse rpm, Tap OUTM53 ; Forward rpmB240 ; Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.X.375 F24.9 ; Tap INM54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse rpm, Tap OUTM98 P1 ; Call: Safe End Program OneM01 ; Optional StopM30 ; End Program/Rewind
11-6 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 11-7
- NOTES -
11-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 12 - C AXIS PROGRAMMING [Option]
INTRODUCTIONIn addition to standard lathe turning operations,
the C axis option provides the programmer withthree distinct machining capabilities: Live Toolingwith Spindle Orient Figure 12.1, Polar CoordinateInterpolation (face milling operations) Figure 12.2,and Cylindrical Interpolation (contoured milling onthe outside diameter of the workpiece) Figure12.3 . This feature makes it possible to performturning and milling operations on one machine.
DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONSIn addition to the data words described in Chap-
ter 1, the following data words, G codes, and Mcode are used for programming the C axis:
C Word - Absolute position command for C axis.With polar coordinate interpolation, Cvalues are linear (inch or millimeter)units. With spindle orient or cylindricalinterpolation, C values are in degrees.A decimal point is required with the Cword.
H Word - Incremental position command for Caxis. With Polar Coordinate Interpola-tion, H values are linear (inch or milli-meter) units. When using Spindle Ori-ent or Cylindrical Interpolation, H val-ues are in degrees.
G17 - Used to specify the X,C plane.
G18 - Used to specify the X,Z plane.
G19 - Used to specify the Z,C plane.G107 - Specifies Cylindrical Interpolation. Once
cylindrical interpolation has been acti-vated, it is only necessary for the pro-grammer to specify the end point of amove by a linear Z value in inches ormillimeters, an angular C value in de-grees and a feedrate. Moves requiringcircular interpolation must be pro-grammed with the appropriate G02 orG03 command and an R value for thearc radius.
G112 - Specifies Polar Coordinate Interpola-tion.
(Continued on next page)
TI1980
C
Figure 12.1 - C Axis Spindle Orient
C and X Axis Moves
CX
TI1982
Figure 12.2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation
ZC
TI1981
C and Z Axis Moves
Figure 12.3 - Cylindrical Interpolation(Viewed from the back of the machine)
M-320A 12-1
G113 - Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation.M23 - Activate Contouring mode. This command must be programmed in a block preceding
the block calling for C axis.M24 - Cancel Contouring mode.
C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT- NOTE -
The following description applies to CONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with theoptional programmable C axis. For lathes equipped with the standard spindle orientfeature, refer to Chapter 11.
Figure 12.4 shows the Zero Reference point for the spindle. The spindle key is located at a 90degree angle from the machine bed when the spindle is at C0. On machines equipped with theC axis, spindle orient is commanded using the C word and the desired degree value. Referringto Figure 12.4, when the spindle is at C0, a command of C20. will cause the spindle to rotate 20degrees in the reverse (M04) direction and a command of C-20. will cause the spindle to rotate20 degrees in the forward (M03) direction. Refer to the program format which follows and to thesample program section beginning on page 12-3.
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM FORMAT WITH C AXIS
- NOTE -This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format provided inChapter 1.
BEGINNING OF OPERATIONN _ _ _ _ (____________); Sequence Number and MessageM98 P1; Safe Start SubprogramT _ _ _ _; Index and Call OffsetX _ _ _ _ Z _ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour ModeG97 S _ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and DirectionC _ _ _ _; Orient Spindle
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PARTG1 X _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F _ _ _ _; Move Tool to Clear PartG00 C _ _ _ _; Re-Orient if NeededG1 X _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F _ _ _ _; Machine Part
END OF OPERATIONX _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F_ _ _ _; Move Tool to Clear PartM98 P1; O.D. End SubprogramM01; Operation Stop
12-2 M-320A
- NOTES -1. C Positive Command will rotate (M04) Reverse Direction.2. Orient Command (C _ _ _ _) has a 5.3 program format.3. M23 must be active for C axis commands.4. H Command is incremental for C axis.
SAMPLE LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM WITH C AXIS
The sample part, shown in Figure 12.5, is to be milled, center drilled, drilled, and tapped onthe outside diameter. In this example, the C axis is used for spindle orientation only. All tools aretouched off at center point.
TURRET TOOLING OPERATION SEQUENCE
Station 2 7/8 End Mill . . . . . . . 3 Flats (1/8" Depth)Station 4 #4 Center Drill . . . . . . 3 Holes (1/4" Depth)Station 6 #7 Drill . . . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (9/16" Depth)Station 8 1/4-20 Tap . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (7/16" Depth)
LIVE TOOLING CODES
M23 C Axis ModeM51 Forward RPMM52 Reverse RPMM53 Forward RPM / Coolant ONM54 Reverse RPM / Coolant ONM55 Stop RPM
* Face working tools will rotate in Opposite Direction *
Turret Top PlateSpindle DriveButton
45°
SpindleKey
M03Rotation
Machine Bed
90°
45°
Ti2085Floor
SpindleKey
SpindleKey
C0
C0
M04Rotation
M03Rotation
C0
20°
-20°
Figure 12.4 - Spindle Orient Zero Reference Angle(As viewed from the tailstock end of the machine)
M-320A 12-3
PROGRAM% STOP CODEO1004; PROGRAM NUMBERG20; INCH MODEN2 (7/8 END MILL); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGEM98 P1; SAFE START SUBPROGRAMT0202; INDEX, CALL OFFSETX 1.25 Z.537 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODEG97 S2500 M53; 2500 FORWARD CUTTER RPMC0.; ORIENT TO 0 DEGREESG1 Z-1.1625 F3.; MILL IN AT 3 IPMX1.6 F20.; X AXIS CLEARG00 Z.537 C120.; RAPID TO START, ORIENT 120 DEG.X1.25; X AXIS TO STARTG1 Z-1.1625 F3.; MILL IN AT 3 IPMX1.6 F20.; X AXIS CLEARG00 Z.537 C240.; RAPID TO START, ORIENT 120 DEG.X1.25; X AXIS TO STARTG1 Z-1.1625 F3.; MILL IN AT 3 IPMX1.6 F20.; X AXIS CLEARM98 P1; OD END SUBPROGRAMM01; OPERATION STOP
N4 (#4 CENTER DRILL); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGEM98 P1; SAFE START SUBPROGRAMT0404; INDEX, CALL OFFSETX1.6 Z-.8 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODEG97 S3500 M53; 3500 FORWARD DRILL RPMC240.; ORIENT TO 240 DEG.G1 X.75 F4.; DRILL IN AT 4 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARC0.; ORIENT TO 0 DEG.G1 X.75 F4.; DRILL IN AT 4 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARC120.; ORIENT TO 120 DEG.
2.50
1.60Typ.
.80Typ.
7/16 Rad.Typ.
#4 Center Drill, .25 Deep#7 Drill, 9/16 Deep1/4-20 UNC Tap, 7/16 Deep3 Places 120° Apart
90°.125 Typ.
1.50 Dia.
3 Flats 120° Apart
TI2026
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
Figure 12.5 - Sample Live Tooling Workpiece
12-4 M-320A
G1 X.75 F4.; DRILL IN AT 4 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARM98 P1; OD END SUBPROGRAMM01; OPERATION STOP
N6 (#7 DRILL, 9/16 DP); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGEM98 P1; SAFE START SUBPROGRAMT0606; INDEX, CALL OFFSETX1.6 Z-.8 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODEG97 S1500 M53; 1500 FORWARD DRILL RPMC120.; ORIENT TO 120 DEG.G1 X.125 F2.; DRILL IN AT 2 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARC240.; ORIENT TO 240 DEG.G1 X.125 F2.; DRILL IN AT 2 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARC0.; ORIENT TO 0 DEG.G1 X.125 F2.; DRILL IN AT 2 IPMG00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEARM98 P1; OD END SUBPROGRAMM01; OPERATION STOP
N8 (1/4-20 TAP); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGEM98 P1; SAFE START SUBPROGRAMT0808; INDEX, CALL OFFSETX1.7 Z-.8 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODEG97 S500 M53; 500 FORWARD RPMC0.; ORIENT TO 0 DEG.M49; DISABLE FEED OVERRIDEG1 X.375 F24.9; TAP INX1.7 M54 F25.; REVERSE, TAP OUTM53; FORWARD RPMG00 C120.; ORIENT TO 120 DEG.G1 X.375 F24.9; TAP INX1.7 M54 F25.; REVERSE, TAP OUTM53; FORWARD RPMG00 C240.; ORIENT TO 240 DEG.G1 X.375 F24.9; TAP INX1.7 M54 F25.; REVERSE, TAP OUTM48; ENABLE FEED OVERRIDEM98 P1; OD END SUBPROGRAMM01; OPERATION STOPM30; END PROGRAM, REWIND% STOP CODE
- NOTE -G00 Mode is used for C axis orientation to ensure the orient is done at a rapid rate. IfG1 mode is active, spindle feed rate is interpreted as degrees.
- CAUTION -Be sure G1 mode is activated for cutting moves.
M-320A 12-5
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATIONPolar Coordinate Interpolation is used when it is desired to perform milling operations on the
face of the workpiece that require synchronous movement of the spindle and the live toolingmounted on the turret. When Polar Coordinate Interpolation is commanded by the G112 com-mand, the control interprets several pieces of data to determine the direction and speed that theaxes must be moved to reach the commanded end point.
Sample programs 2 through 6 show examples of how polar coordinate interpolation is used.Refer also to the guidelines on page 12-7 and to the program format on page 12-8.
COORDINATE SYSTEM
Figure 12.6 shows the coordinate system used with polar coordinate interpolation. The pro-grammed end points are laid out as coordinates on this plane. Note the signs for X and C. Theprogram examples illustrate the use of this system.
- NOTE -A C- command will cause the spindle to turn in the forward (M03) direction and a C+command will cause the spindle to rotate in the reverse (M04) direction.
C-X+
C 0
C+Z+
X- TI1987
Figure 12.6 - Polar Coordinate System(Viewed from the front of the machine)
12-6 M-320A
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES
1. The following G codes may be used when G112 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41,G42, G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.
2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G112 is active.
3. When using circular interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the Rword.
4. M23 Contouring mode must be activated before commanding the C axis. Refer to thePolar Coordinate Format on page 12-8.
5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding polar coordinateinterpolation. Refer to the Polar Coordinate Format on page 12-8.
6. If machining in the X axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not activate polarcoordinate interpolation G112 Command for X and C axis.
7. With G112 active, the tool cannot be programmed to pass over the center of the work-piece.
8. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves.
9. Z axis moves are made independently of polar coordinate interpolation.
10. The unit of command for the C axis, when polar coordinate interpolation is used, isinches or millimeters, not degrees.
11. When using cutter compensation during polar coordinate Interpolation, the same basicTool Nose Radius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. How-ever, the following rules must also be observed:
a) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file.For polar coordinate interpolation, the X tool offset represents the center of the cutterand the tool tip location (Quadrant) will be 9.
b) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be pro-grammed after the polar interpolation command (G112 line) has been activated. ThisTool Nose Radius Compensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. Forpolar coordinate interpolation, the X axis move must be equal to at least two timesthe tool radius entered in the offset file.
c) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before theblock containing the G113 (Cancel Polar Coordinate interpolation).
12. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when G112 polar coordinate interpola-tion is active.
13. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.
14. X values are diameters and C values are radii.
M-320A 12-7
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
- NOTE -This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format provided inChapter 1.
BEGINNING OF OPERATIONN _ _ _ _ ( ); Sequence Number and MessageM98 P1; Safe Start SubprogramT_ _ _ _; Index and Call OffsetX_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour ModeG97 S_ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and DirectionC0.; Orient Spindle to 0 DegreesG1 G112; Activate Polar Coordinate InterpolationC _ _ _ _ F50.; Reorient Before Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (if desired)
ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONG41 (G42) X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ F50.; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation Non-Cutting
Air Move
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PARTX_ _ _ _ or Z_ _ _ _ F_ _; Move to Clear PartG40 U1.; Cancel Tool Nose Radius CompensationG113; Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation
END OF OPERATIONM98 P1; O.D. End SubprogramM01; Operation Stop
12-8 M-320A
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONUSED WITH G112 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
Figure 12.7 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes usedwith polar coordinate interpolation. The shaded area of each drawing represents the finished partcontour.
TI2086
C0
X0
C0
C0
X0
C0
1
4
3
1
2
41
32
4
3 2
1
2
4
3
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)G02 Clockwise ArcM03 Forward Rotation
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)G03 Counterclockwise ArcM04 Reverse Rotation
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)G02 Clockwise ArcM03 Forward Rotation
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)G03 Counterclockwise ArcM04 Reverse Rotation
Figure 12.7 - Tool Nose Radius Compensationand Circular Interpolation Codes
(Used with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
M-320A 12-9
PROGRAM EXAMPLES
- NOTE -Before the programs can be written, it must be determined where the end point coordi-nates are on the system. Figure 12.8 shows the end point positions required to write theprogram for Example 2.
Although the tool cannot actually move around the part, for programming purposes, it iseasier to imagine that this is what is taking place.
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in all of the polar coordinate examples shownin this chapter. When entering the tool orientation code for milling tools, use 0 or 9.
TI2024
X.750C.375
X.750C0
X.750C-.375
X-.750C.375
X-.750C-.375
C0
X0
Figure 12.8 - End Point Cutter Positions(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active)
12-10 M-320A
Example 2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Square:Figure 12.9 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a .750 inch by .200 inch
deep square is to be milled. In this example, the diameter of the milling tool is .50 inches
Program:
(START POINT 1) (START POINT 2)(START CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.375)
N2 (MILL 3/4 SQ R.25 Q9); N2 (MILL 3/4 SQ R.25 Q9);M98 P1; M98 P1;T0202; T0202;X1.4 Z.2 M23; X1.4 Z.2 M23;G97 S900 M54; G97 S900 M54;C0.; C0.;G1 G112; G1 G112;G41 X.75 Z.1 F50.; C-.375 F100.;Z-.2 F3.; G41 X.75 Z.1 F50.;C-.375; Z-.2 F3.;X-.75; X-.75;C.375; C.375;X.75; X.75;C0.; C-.375;Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;G40 U1.; G40 U1.;G113; G113;M98 P1; M98 P1;M01; M01;
1.375 .200
.750
TI2018
NOTE: Dimensions are in inches.
STARTPOINT 1
STARTPOINT 2
Figure 12.9 - Programming Example 2 - Square(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
M-320A 12-11
Example 3 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Hexagon:Figure 12.10 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a hexagon is to be ma-
chined. The hexagon measures 1.1908 inches across the flats and the width of the flats is .6875inches. The diameter of the cutter is .25 inches.
Program:
(REVERSE SPINDLE DIRECTION) (FORWARD SPINDLE DIRECTION)
N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9); N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9);M98 P1; M98 P1;T0404; T0404;X1.5 Z.2 M23; X1.5 Z.2 M23;G97 S750 M54; G97 S750 M54;C0.; C0.;G1 G112; G1 G112;G42 X1.1908 Z.1 F50.; G41 X1.1908 Z.1 F50.;Z-.25 F3.5; Z-.25 F3.5;C.3437; C-.3437;X0 C.6875; X0 C-.6875;X-1.1908 C.3437; X-1.1908 C-.3437;C-.3437; C.3437;X0 C-.6875; X0 C.6875;X1.1908 C-.3437; X1.1908 C.3437;C0.; C0.;Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;G40 U1.; G40 U1.;G113; G113;M98 P1; M98 P1;M01; M01;
NOTE: All dimensions are inches.
1.375 .250
.6875TI2020
1.1908
Figure 12.10 - Programming Example 3 - Hexagon(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
12-12 M-320A
Example 4 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Triangle:Figure 12.11 shows a 1.375 inch piece of stock that is to have an equilateral triangle with
.8438 inch sides machined on it. The diameter of the cutter is .50 inches.
Program:
(FEED INTO PART FACE) (FEED ONTO PART O.D.)
N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9); N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9);M98 P1; M98 P1;T0606; T0606;X1.5 Z.2 M23; X1.75 Z0 M23;G97 S650 M54; G97 S650 M54;C0.; C0.;G1 G112; G1 G112;G41 X.9742 Z.1 F50.; G41 X1.2 Z-.125 F50.;Z-.125 F2.5; X.9742 F2.5;X-.487 C-.4219; X-.487 C-.4219;C.4219; C.4219;X.9742 C0.; X.9742 C0.;Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;G40 U1.; G40 U1.;G113; G113;M98 P1; M98 P1;M01; M01;
1.375 .125
.8438
TI2019
NOTE: All dimensions are inches.
.4871
.2435
Figure 12.11 - Programming Example 4 - Triangle(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
M-320A 12-13
Example 5 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - TongueFigure 12.12 shows a 1.125 inch piece of stock on which a tongue .625 inch is to be ma-
chined. The cutter diameter is .75 inches.
Program:
(START POINT 1) (START POINT 2)(Start CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.5825)
N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9); N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9);M98 P1; M98 P1;T0202; T0202;X2. Z.2 M23; X2. Z.2 M23;G97 S700 M54; G97 S700 M54;C0.; C0.;G1 G112; G1 G112;G41 X.625 Z-.1 F50.; C-.5825 F100.;Z-.156 F3.; G41 X-.625 Z-.156 F50.;C-.5825; Z-.156 F.3;X-.625 F20. (AIR MOVE); C.5825;C.5825 F3.; X.625 F20.;X.625 F20., (AIR MOVE); C-.5825;C0. F3.; Z.1 F20.;Z.1 F20.; G40 U1.;G40 U1.; G113;G113; M98 P1;M98 P1; M01;M01;
.625
1.125 .156
TI2017
NOTE: All dimensions are inches.
STARTPOINT 1
STARTPOINT 2
Figure 12.12 - Programming Example 5 - Tongue(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
12-14 M-320A
Example 6 - Polar Interpolation - Radius Diamond:Figure 12.13 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which four 1.00 inch radii are to
be cut to form a diamond shaped pattern. Cutter diameter is .50 inches.
Program:
(FORWARD SPINDLE) (REVERSE SPINDLE)N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9); N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9);M98 P1; M98 P1;T0606; T0606;X2. Z.2 M23; X2. Z.2 M23;G97 S800 M54; G97 S800 M54;C0.; C0.;G1 G112; G1 G112;G41 X1.375 Z.1 F50.; G42 X1.375 Z.1 F50.;Z-.2 F3.5; Z-.2 F3.5;G3 X0 C-.6875 R1.; G2 X0 C.6875 R1.;G3 X-1.375 C0. R1.; G2 X-1.375 C0. R1.;G3 X0 C.6875 R1.; G2 X0 C-.6875 R1.;G3 X1.375 C0. R1.; G2 X1.375 C0. R1.;G1 Z.2 F20.; G1 Z.2 F20.;G40 U1.; G40 U1.;G113; G113;M98 P1; M98 P1;M01; M01;
1.375 .200
1.00 Rad.
TI2021
NOTE: All dimensions are inches.
Figure 12.13 - Programming Example 6 - Radius Diamond(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
M-320A 12-15
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATIONCylindrical Interpolation (G107) is used to perform contoured milling operations on the outside
diameter (O.D.) of the workpiece. The Z and C words are used to specify the end points of themoves. When using cylindrical interpolation, the C word is programmed in degrees. The C wordis also used to specify the radius of the part in the G107 block which activates cylindrical interpo-lation. The X word is used to program the depth of cut. Refer to Figure 12.14 for the coordinatesystem used with cylindrical interpolation.
LIVE TOOLING CODES USED FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
M51 Forward RPMM52 Reverse RPMM53 Forward RPM/Coolant ONM54 Reverse RPM/Coolant ONM55 Stop RPM
* Face working tools will rotate in Opposite Direction *- NOTE -
G19 remains active after cylindrical interpolation is canceled. G18 must be programmedto specify the X,Z plane for machining. Add G18 to the first line of safe start/end subpro-gram O1, as shown below:
O1 ; Safe Start & O.D. End Subprogram
N1 G00 G18 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Activate X,Z Plane, Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation,Direct RPM, IPM Feed
N2 M98 P999 ; Call Subprogram: Safe Index
N3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program
C0
+X
-X
+Z
TI1987
C-
C+
Figure 12.14 - Coordinate System forCylindrical Interpolation
12-16 M-320A
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
- NOTE -This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format provided inChapter 1.
BEGINNING OF OPERATIONN _ _ _ _( ); Sequence Number and MessageM98 P1; Safe Start SubprogramT_ _ _ _; Index and Call OffsetX_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour ModeG97 S _ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and DirectionG19 C0.; Orient Spindle to 0 DegreesG1 G107 C (Part Radius); Activate Cylindrical Interpolation and Part RadiusC _ _ _ _ F50.; Reorient Before Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (if desired)
ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATIONG41 (G42) X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ F50.; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation,
Non-Cutting Air Move
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PARTX_ _ _ _ or Z_ _ _ _ F50; Move to Clear PartG40 U1.; Cancel Tool Nose Radius CompensationG107 C0.; Cancel Cylindrical Mode
END OPERATIONM98 P1; O.D. End SubprogramM01; Operation Stop
M-320A 12-17
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES
1. The following G codes may be used when G107 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41,G42, G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.
2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G107 is active.
3. When using circular interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the Rword.
4. M23 Contouring mode must be activated before commanding the C axis. Refer to “Pro-gram Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17.
5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding cylindrical inter-polation. Refer to “Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17. Theformula for calculating the value of the C word is shown in Figures 12.16, 12.17, and12.18 .
6. If machining in the X axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not activate polarcoordinate interpolation G112 Command for X and C axis.
7. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves.
8. The unit of command for the C axis, when cylindrical interpolation is used, is degrees,not inches or millimeters.
9. When using cutter compensation with cylindrical Interpolation, the same basic Tool NoseRadius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. However, the fol-lowing rules must also be observed:
a) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file.For cylindrical interpolation, the Z tool offset represents the center of the cutter andthe tool tip location (Quadrant) will be 9.
b) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be pro-grammed after the cylindrical interpolation command (G107 line) has been activated.Refer to “Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17. This ToolNose Radius Compensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. Forcylindrical interpolation, the Z axis move must be equal to at least the tool radiusamount entered in the offset file.
c) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before theblock containing the G107 C0 command (Cancel Cylindrical Interpolation). Refer to“Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation” on page 12-17.
10. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when G107 cylindrical interpolation isactive.
11. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.
12. Add G18 to the first line of safe start/end subprogram O1 to ensure that the X,Z plane isactive for standard machining.
12-18 M-320A
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATIONUSED WITH G107 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
Figure 12.15 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes usedwith cylindrical interpolation. The part circumference is viewed laying flat with the part face (Z0)at the base.
Z0
C AXIS
Z0 PART FACE
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)G03 Counterclockwise Arc
Z0
Z0 PART FACE
C AXIS
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)G02 Clockwise Arc
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)G03 Counterclockwise Arc
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)G02 Clockwise Arc
Z0 PART FACEZ0 PART FACE
C AXISC AXIS
Z0 Z0
TI2087
Figure 12.15 - Tool Nose Radius Compensationand Circular Interpolation
(Used with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation)
M-320A 12-19
Program:
N2 (Sharp Tool .025 Depth); C0. F3.;M98 P1; Z-.85;T0202; G2 Z-.85 C-15.34 R.094;X1.6 Z-.5 M23; G1 Z-.750;G97 S850 M53; Z-.85 F5.;G19 C0.; G2 Z-.85 C-30.69 R.094 F3.;G1 G107 C.7; G1 Z-.75;X1.35 F4.5; X1.5 F20.;C-15.34 F3.; Z-.994;Z-.7; X1.35 F4.5;C-30.69; Z-1.094 F3.;X1.5 F20.; X1.5 F20.;C0.; C0.;X1.35 F4.5; X1.35 F4.5;C-15.34 F3.; Z-.994 F3.;Z-.5; Z-1.044 F5.;C-30.69; C-30.69 F3.;X1.5 F20.; X1.5 F20.;Z-.750 G107 C0.;X1.35 F4.5; M98 P1;
M01;
TI1985
Note: All dimensions are in inches. Circumference = 1.4 * π = 4.3982 inchesDegree = INCH * 360
CIRCUMFERENCE= .1875 * 360
4.3982= 15.34
π = 3.1416Z0 1.094
.500
.375
C-15.34(-.1875 inch)
1.400
C0 C-30.69(-.375 inch)
Z-.750
Z-.500
Z-.994
.094R
.100
.200
.194
Figure 12.16 - Example 7 - Lettering On Part O.D.(Cylindrical Interpolation)
12-20 M-320A
Program:
N4 (Sharp Tool .020 Depth);M98 P1;T0404;X1.7 Z-.7 M23;G97 S1500 M53G19 C0.;G1 G107 C.750;X1.46 F3.5;Z-1.3;C-28.64Z-.7;C0.;X1.6 F20.;G107 C0.;M98 P1;M01;
π = 3.1416 TI1988
1.300
.700
Z0
.375
1.500C0° C -28.64° (- .375 inch)
Z-1.300
Z-.700
Circumference = 1.5 * π = 4.7124 inchesDegree = INCH * 360
CIRCUMFERENCE= .375 * 360
4.7124= 28.64
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
Figure 12.17 - Example 8 - Rectangle Etched on Part O.D.(Cylindrical Interpolation)
M-320A 12-21
Program:
N6 (Sharp Tool .02 Depth);M98 P1;T0606;X1.6 Z-.875 M23;G97 S1200 M53;G19 C0.;G1 G107 C.7185;X1.397 F4.;Z-1.5 F3.;G2 Z-1.625 C-9.96 R.125;G1 C-29.90;G2 Z-1.5 C-39.87 R.125;G1 Z-.875;G2 Z-.750 C-29.90 R.125;G1 C-9.96;G2 Z-.875 C0. R.125;G1 X1.5 F20.;G107 C0.;M98 P1;M01;
π = 3.1416TI1989
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
Circumference = 1.437 * π = 4.5145 inchesDegree = INCH * 360
CIRCUMFERENCE= .5 * 360
4.5145= 39.87
1.625
(4) 1/8" Radius
1.437 C0
.750
.500
.125(9.96°)
C-.5
Z-1.625
.125
Z-.750
ToolPath
StartPoint
Typical Corner
Z0
Figure 12.18 - Example 9 - Rectangle with Corner Radii(Cylindrical Interpolation)
12-22 M-320A
To calculate the total amount of C in degrees:
(Z travel / pitch) * 360
N2 (1/8" END MILL, 5/16" PITCH);M98 P1;T0202;X.95 Z-.3 M23;G97 S1200 M53;G19 C0.;G1 G107 C.375;X.5 F4.;Z-2.05 C-2016. F2.;X.85 F20.;G107 C0.;M98 P1;M01;
NOTES:
1. C minus command (forward spindle) for right-hand thread.
2. X, Z, and C axis may be programmed together in the same block if the root diameter isto increase or decrease (tapered thread).
TI2124
2.050
1.750
.3125Pitch .125
.750
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
Figure 12.19 - Example 10 - Worm Gear(Cylindrical Interpolation)
M-320A 12-23
C AXIS ALARMS
- NOTE -For a complete listing of control error codes, refer to the GE Fanuc 18T OperationManual.
Alarm Description
021 An axis not included in selection plane was commanded in circularinterpolation. Cylindrical Interpolation requires G19.
028 In the plane selected, two o more axes in the same direction arecommanded (Format G19 C0;).
041 Overcutting will occur in Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
145 Polar commands G112 and G113 require that Tool Nose RadiusCompensation be inactive (G40 condition).
146 Illegal G code commanded while in Polar Interpolation (G00 is notallowed).
175 Cylindrical G107 must have C (part radius) at start and C0 at end.Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be inactive when above com-mands are read (G40 condition).
176 Illegal G code has been commanded while in Cylindrical Interpolation(G00 is not allowed).
197 M23 mode must be active for C commands.
212 Blueprint assist (A commands) are allowed only while X,Z plane isactive. Illegal command while in polar or cylindrical.
12-24 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 12-25
- NOTES -
12-26 M-320A
CHAPTER 13 - END-WORKING TURRET [Option]
INTRODUCTIONCONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with the end-working turret are capable of perform-
ing more sophisticated turning applications due to the greater number and variety of tooling thatcan be employed.
Be sure that the end-working turret is in the home position when running applications that donot require the end-working turret.
The travel specifications for the end-working turret are shown in Figure 13.1 .
4.75[120.7]
18.03 [457.96]Solid Stop
17.560 [446.02]Software Limit
17.500 [444.50]Axis Reference Position
3.91 [99.3]
.125 [3.18]
2.250 [57.15]Software Limit
1.780 [45.21]Solid Stop
MainSpindle
CL
TIA2695
Travel Specification Notes:
1. Dimensions are shown as inches [millimeters].
2. All measurements for Y are from the face of the main spindle.
3. Full programmable travel on the Y axis is 15.310 [388.87].
Figure 13.1 - End-Working Turret Travel Specifications
M-320A 13-1
TOOLING
TOOLING TYPES
The end-working turret is designed to be used for center-working tools only. The followingtypes of tooling can be mounted on the end-working turret:
Adjustable Boring BarsDrillsReamersStock StopsTapping AttachmentsTailstock Centers
TOOLING RANGE
The end-working turret is set up from the factory with either English or Metric bushings perma-nently mounted on the top plate. The permanently mounted English bushings have an internaldiameter of 1-1/4 inches. The permanently mounted Metric bushings have an internal diameter of32 millimeters. Be sure to use the appropriate tool holders or bushings (English or Metric) for thetype of top plate on your machine.
Round shank tools 1-1/4 inches or 32 millimeters in diameter can be mounted directly onto theEnglish or Metric top plates, respectively. Round shank tools in specific sizes ranging from 1/32inch [1 millimeter] up to 3/4 inch [20 millimeters] can be mounted on the end-working top plateusing the Hardinge Double-Angle Toolholder Collet and Toolholder System. Round shank toolsin specific sizes ranging from 1/2 inch [12 millimeters] up to 1 inch [25 millimeters] can bemounted on the end-working top plate using Hardinge HDC-10 bushings.
13-2 M-320A
PROGRAMMING- CAUTION -
When programming main turret motion, be aware of the position of the end-working turret and the minimum recommended clearance of 1.25 inches[31.8mm] from the centerline of the active tool station on the end-workingturret. Refer to Figure 13.2 .
Programmed motion of the end-working turret is controlled through the use of sub-routinesembedded directly in the main part program or with a G110 “one-shot” command. The subrou-tines define end-working turret motion, they do not initiate end-working turret motion. Refer to“Executing a Sub-Routine”, on page 13-8, for information on executing multiple end-working tur-ret commands. Refer to “G110 One-Shot Command”, on page 13-8, for information on executingindividual end-working turret commands.
A maximum of three sub-routines can defined at a time. These sub-routines are typicallyembedded at the beginning of the main part program before actual machine motion is initiated.
End-working turret sub-routines can be executed simultaneously with main turret operations.These simultaneous operations can also be synchronized through the use of the M60 synchroni-zation code. Refer to “Synchronization Code”, on page 13-8.
The following G codes are used to mark the beginning and end of these sub-routines:
G100: End of End-Working Turret Sub-RoutineG101: Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1G102: Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2G103: Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3
1.25[31.8]
TI2727
Location of Turret Station #7
Inches[Millimeters]
Figure 13.2 - End-Working Turret Stations
M-320A 13-3
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
Sample Part Program:
O1234 ; Part Program NameN____ G101 ; Beginning of Sub-Routine #1 Definition. .. .N____ G100 ; End of End-Working Turret Sub-RoutineN____ G102 ; Beginning of Sub-Routine #2 Definition. .. .N____ G100 ; End of End-Working Turret Sub-RoutineN____ G103 ; Beginning of Sub-Routine #3 Definition. .. .N____ G100 ; End of End-Working Turret Sub-RoutineN_ (Operator Message) Sequence Number and Operator Message. Standard Part Program Execution. ”. ”
VALID PROGRAMMING DATA WORDS
The data words described in this section are the only data words that can be included in theend-working turret sub-routines. Refer to Chapter 1 for a complete listing of data words used toprogram the GE Fanuc 18T control.
- CAUTION -When programming an end-working turret sub-routine, program only the G,M, and T codes listed in this section.
DO NOT program S codes in an end-working turret sub-routine.
- NOTE -Program all other data words needed for end-working turret operation in the mainpart program just before the command that executes the end-working turret sub-routine.
When programming end-working turret sub-routines, program each M code and Tcode in a block by itself.
13-4 M-320A
F WordThe F word is used to establish feedrate. When used with the G98 command, it expresses the
feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. When used with the G99 command, it expressesthe feedrate in inches or millimeters per revolution.
When G98 is active, the maximum programmable feedrate for the end-working turret is 394in/min [10000 mm/min]. When G99 is active, the maximum programmable feedrate is:
Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ rev/minMaximum Feedrate (mm/min) = millimeter per minute ÷ rev/min
G Word (Preparatory Codes)G00 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)G01 Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed)G04 DwellG80 Cancel Canned CycleG81 Drilling Cycle - Spot DrillingG83 Peck Drilling CycleG84 Tapping CycleG98 Per Minute FeedG99 Per Revolution FeedG100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-RoutineG101 Start of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1G102 Start of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2G103 Start of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3
M Word (Miscellaneous Codes)M03 Spindle Forward command.M04 Spindle Reverse command.M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF command.M21 Open Collet command.M22 Close Collet command.M25 Part Catcher RetractM26 Part Catcher ExtendM60 Synchronization code for simultaneous main and end-working turret operation.
Refer to page 13-8 for more information on the synchronization code.
M-320A 13-5
T Word
- CAUTION -Read the information in the section entitled “Index On The Fly”, below, BE-FORE programming index commands for the end-working turret.
DO NOT attempt to use the end-working turret to machine the workpiecewhen station 7 is in the active position. This turret station is for clearancepurposes ONLY.
The T code selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activatesthe corresponding tool offset data.
When programming end-working turret sub-routines, the data word format is T3. Decimal pointprogramming is NOT allowed. The geometry and wear offset number always match the turretstation number.
INDEX ON THE FLYThe end-working turret is designed for “index on the fly” operation. When a index com-
mand is read by the CNC control, the control acts on the index command, but also continuesreading and acting on the rest of the part program. If a lower axis move is read by thecontrol before the turret index is completed, the end-working turret will move while it isindexing.
If necessary, program a dwell command (G04) and a time factor (P, U, or X data word) inthe data block immediately following the data block containing the index command. Someexperimentation may be required to determine the optimum time factor, but it should neverbe necessary to program a time factor greater than 1.24 seconds. Refer to Chapter 1 formore information on the dwell command.
T Code Definitions:
T100 No turret index, Y axis tool offset is canceled.T101 End-working turret indexes to station #1, Y axis tool offset #1 is activated.T102 End-working turret indexes to station #2, Y axis tool offset #2 is activated.T103 End-working turret indexes to station #3, Y axis tool offset #3 is activated.T104 End-working turret indexes to station #4, Y axis tool offset #4 is activated.T105 End-working turret indexes to station #5, Y axis tool offset #5 is activated.T106 End-working turret indexes to station #6, Y axis tool offset #6 is activated.T107 End-working turret indexes to station #7, Y axis tool offset #7 is activated.
Y Word
- NOTE -Absolute programming MUST be used. Incremental programming is not allowed.
The Y word is an absolute distance command for the end-working turret. It is measured rela-tive to the face of the main spindle and is written with a Y followed by a plus (+) or minus (-)sign. The plus sign may be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is pro-grammed.
Refer to Chapter 1 for more information on the Y data word.
13-6 M-320A
PROGRAMMABLE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMS
- CAUTION -All values to be entered into the work coordinate systems MUST be pro-grammed as positive (+) values.
Be sure that the Y axis value in the standard work shift offset register is setto “0" (zero) when using one of the programmable work coordinate systems(G54 through G59) to set the Y axis work shift value.
The GE Fanuc series 18T control provides six work coordinate system registers that can beactivated through the use of G codes. The Y axis work shift can be input directly into theseregisters from the Manual Data Input keyboard or from the main part program by using the G10command. When changing the work shift for Y axis operations, it is necessary to load the re-quired values into one of the following work coordinate offset registers from the main part pro-gram, NOT from an end-working turret sub-routine.
When included in the part program, the work shift commands are typically programmed at thebeginning of the main part program before actual machine motion is initiated. Once the valueshave been loaded into the desired coordinate system registers, the desired work shift registercan be activated from the main part program, NOT from an end-working turret sub-routine.
The work coordinate system G codes are:
G54 : Work coordinate system 1 (Power-up Default)G55 : Work coordinate system 2G56 : Work coordinate system 3G57 : Work coordinate system 4G58 : Work coordinate system 5G59 : Work coordinate system 6
Programming FormatG10 L2 P_ Y____ ;
G10 : Offset Value commandL2 : Required commandP_ : Selects G54 through G59
P1 = G54 P4 = G57P2 = G55 P5 = G58P1 = G56 P6 = G59
Y____Value to be loaded into Y axis register
Example:
G10 L2 P2 Y3.75 ;
The value “3.75" is loaded into the G55 Y axis work coordinate system register.
Activating a Work Coordinate SystemTo activate a work coordinate system, program the required command (G54, G55, G56, G57,
G58, or G59), in a block by itself, in the main part program.
M-320A 13-7
SUB-ROUTINES
- NOTE -The end-working turret subroutines defined through the use of the G101, G102,and G103 commands are NOT retained when the control is turned OFF.
Executing a Sub-RoutineAs stated earlier, G codes G100 through G103 are only used to define end-working turret
operation, they do not initiate end-working turret operation. Once the end-working turret sub-rou-tines have been defined, they can be executed from the main part program through the use ofthe following M codes:
M81 Executes end-working sub-routine #1
M82 Executes end-working sub-routine #2
M83 Executes end-working sub-routine #3
No other data words may be programmed in a block containing an M81, M82, or M83.
G110 ONE-SHOT COMMAND
The G110 command allows the programmer to execute single end-working turret commandsfrom a data block in the main part program, instead of defining the action in a sub-routine. TheG110 block can only command one action; for example:
N____ G110 T105 ; Index to station #5, activate Y axis tool offset #5
As many G110 blocks as needed may be programmed, but only one action may be com-manded in each G110 block. For example:
N40 G110 G0 Y8.5 ; Rapid end-working turret to Y8.5
N45 G110 T104 ; Index to station #4, activate Y axis tool offset #4
N50 G110 G0 Y.1 ; Rapid end-working turret to Y.1
G110 commands are non-modal. Modes active before the G110 command line are reactivatedupon completion of the G110 command line.
SYNCHRONIZATION CODE
The M60 synchronization code, when used, MUST be programmed in both the end-workingturret sub-routine and the main part program. If the control stops either process (main programexecution or sub-routine execution) and does not read an M60 from the other process, theprocess that was stopped WILL NOT RESUME EXECUTION.
When the control reads an M60 command from the main part program, main program execu-tion stops until an M60 command is read by the control from the end-working turret sub-routine.At that time, the end-working turret sub-routine continues executing and the main part programresumes execution.
When the control reads an M60 command from the end-working turret sub-routine, main pro-gram execution stops until an M60 command is read by the control from the main part program.At that time, the main part program continues executing and the end-working turret sub-routineresumes execution.
13-8 M-320A
END-WORKING TURRET PART CATCHERThe optional end-working turret part catcher is mounted on end-working turret tool station #2.
The data words used to control the parts catcher are M25 (Part Catcher Retract) and M26 (PartCatcher Extend).
M25 (Part Catcher Retract)
- NOTE -End-working turret tool station #2 must be indexed to the active position before theworkpiece can be retrieved from the spindle.
M25 commands the control to retract the part catcher plunger, positioning the part catchercone parallel with the spindle centerline. The part catcher must be in this position to retrieve theworkpiece from the spindle. The part catcher cone must be parallel to and in line with the spindlecenterline during workpiece pickup.
M26 (Part Catcher Extend)
- NOTE -Be sure that the end-working turret is moved to the home position and turret station#4 is indexed to the active position before commanding M26.
M26 commands the control to extend the part catcher plunger, moving the parts catcher intoposition to release the workpiece.
SINGLE BLOCK MODEWhen Single Block mode is active, the main part program and end-working turret sub-routines
are both executed one block at a time. If a synchronization code (M60) is encountered, theprocess that contained the synchronization code (the main part program or end-working turretsub-routine) will stop until a synchronization code is read from the other process. The processthat has not stopped will continue to execute in Single Block mode.
Once a synchronization code is read from the second process, both processes will continueexecuting in Single Block mode. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual(M-321) for more information on Single Block mode.
M-320A 13-9
MACHINING CYCLESThe following commands control the machining cycles that can be used with the end-working
turret, through the use of the end-working turret sub-routines:
G80 Cycle CancelG81 Single Pass Drilling CycleG83 Peck Drilling CycleG84 Tapping Cycle
G80 CYCLE CANCEL
The G80 command is used to cancel the G81, G83, and G84 machining cycles. G80 pro-gramming is illustrated in the sample program segments under G81, G83, and G84. G80 MUSTbe programmed immediately after all G81, G83, and G84 machining cycles
G81 SINGLE PASS DRILLING CYCLE
The G81 drilling cycle is used for either single pass drill or center drill operations.
Command Line FormatG81 Y-___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Refer to Figure 13.3 .
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final depth of drilled holeR: Incremental distance from start point to cycle retract pointP: Amount of dwell at bottom of drilled hole (in 1/1000 of seconds) [Optional command]
Example: P500 = ½ second dwellF: Feedrate
- NOTE -It is recommended that the tool be positioned at the cycle retract point (defined by“R”) before the G81 cycle is executed.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.
TI2804
Y Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
RY
CL
Figure 13.3 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Data Word Definitions
13-10 M-320A
Machining SequenceRefer to Figure 13.4 .
1. If not already positioned at “R”, the drill rapids to “R”; then begins moving at the pro-grammed feedrate.
2. The drill continuously cuts at the programmed feedrate until full depth is achieved.
3. When full depth is achieved, the drill rapids back to the cycle start point, as defined by“R”.
4. The G81 cycle is canceled by the G80 command.
Sample Program SegmentRefer to Figure 13.5 .
G00 G98 Y.1 ;G81 Y-1.5 R.1 F8. :G80 ;..
TI2808
Y Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
Rapid Traverse
Programmed Feedrate
CL
Figure 13.4 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Tool Motion
CL
1.500 .100
TI2805
Start Point
Figure 13.5 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece
M-320A 13-11
G83 PECK DRILLING CYCLE
The G83 peck drilling cycle is a constant depth drilling cycle.
Command Line FormatG83 Y-___ Q___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Refer to Figure 13.6 .
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final depth of drilled holeQ: Size of depth incrementR: Incremental distance from part face to cycle retract pointP: Amount of dwell at end of each pass (in 1/1000 of seconds) [Optional command]
Example: P500 = ½ second dwellF: Feedrate (in/min or mm/min)
- NOTE -It is recommended that the tool be positioned at the cycle retract point (defined by“R”) before the G83 cycle is executed.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.
CL
Y R
* Q
+Y
* Rapid-to-Feed Distance,Factory set to .05,Defined by parameter 8258
TI2806
Y Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
Figure 13.6 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Data Word Definitions
13-12 M-320A
Machining SequenceRefer to Figure 13.7 .
1. If not already positioned at “R”, the drill rapids to “R”; then begins moving at the pro-grammed feedrate.
2. The drill moves an incremental distance from the start point at the programmed feedrate,as defined by “Q”.
3. When distance “Q” is achieved, the drill rapids back to the cycle start point, as definedby “R”.
4. The drill rapids in to predetermined distance from the beginning of the next cut. Thisdistance is factory set at .050 through parameter 8258.
5. The drill moves an incremental distance from the end of the last pass at the pro-grammed feedrate, as defined by “Q”.
6. Steps 3 through 5 are repeated until the final pass remains. The final pass will typicallybe less than the value defined by “Q”.
7. After the final pass is performed, the drill rapids to the retract point, as defined by “R”.
8. The G81 cycle is canceled by the G80 command.
CL
Rapid Traverse
Programmed FeedrateY Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
TI2809
Figure 13.7 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Tool Motion
M-320A 13-13
Sample Program SegmentRefer to Figure 13.8 .
G00 G98 Y.1 ;G83 Y-1.5 Q.5 R.1 F5. :G80 ;..
* Rapid-to-Feed Distance,Factory set to .05,Defined by parameter 8258
Start Point
.1001.500
CL
.500*TI2807
Figure 13.8 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece
13-14 M-320A
G84 TAPPING CYCLE
- CAUTION -Programmed feedrates MUST NOT be overridden while a tapping cycle is be-ing executed. To eliminate the possibility of the machine operator overridingthe programmed feedrate during the tapping cycle, program an M79 beforeeach tapping cycle on the end-working turret. Program an M78 to enable thelower axis feedrate override function after the tapping cycle is completed.Refer to the sample program segment on page 13-17.
The G84 tapping cycle can be used for right-hand tapping ONLY.
Command Line FormatG84 Y-___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Refer to Figure 13.9 .
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final tap depth plus lead-inR: Incremental distance from part face to cycle retract pointP: Amount of dwell at bottom of tapped hole (in 1/1000 of seconds)
Example: P500 = ½ second dwellF: Thread Lead (inches or millimeters)
- NOTE -The Y value definition in this section is based on setting the tool offset from the endof the tap, not the first full thread. Modify the Y value accordingly if the tool offset isbased on the first full thread.
The term “lead-in” is used to identify the leading section of the tap that does not cuta full thread.
It is recommended that the tool be positioned at the cycle retract point (defined by“R”) before the G84 cycle is executed.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.
Y Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
+Y
R
Y
CL
TI2812
Depth ofThread
Figure 13.9 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Data Word Definitions
M-320A 13-15
Machining SequenceRefer to Figure 13.10 .
1. If not already positioned at “R”, the drill rapids to “R”; then begins moving at the pro-grammed feedrate.
2. The tap feeds continuously at the programmed feedrate until full depth is achieved.
3. When full depth is achieved, the main spindle automatically reverses and programmeddwell is executed.
4. When dwell is completed, the tap feeds out to the retract point (defined by “R”).
5. Spindle automatically switches to M03 ( Spindle Forward) direction.
6. The G84 cycle is canceled by the G80 command.
Programmed Feedrate
CL
Y Axis Start Point andCycle Retract Point
TI2813
Figure 13.10 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Tool Motion
13-16 M-320A
Sample Program SegmentRefer to Figure 13.11 .
This example assumes:
1/4-28 tap
Tap lead-in of 3/32" [2.5 mm].
Spindle speed preset at 500 rpm (M03)
Sample Program Segment:
M79 ;G101 ;G00 Y.3 ;G84 Y-1.3438 R.3 P800 F17.8 ;G80 ;M60 ;G100 ;M81 ;M60 ;M78 ;..
Start Point(Y.3)
.300
1.3438
1.25
CL
TI2814
Figure 13.11 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Sample Workpiece
M-320A 13-17
ALARM MESSAGES
PMC ALARMS
ALARMNUMBER
ALARMMESSAGE
ALARMDESCRIPTION
5030 Command END without startregistration command.
END command (G100) was read by the control while a STARTcommand (G101, G102, or G103) was NOT active.
5031 Start regist. command again. The control has read a second START command (G101, G102, orG103) without reading an END command.
5032 New movement commandwhile executing B axis.
5033 Cannot be registered bymemory full.
Insufficient part program memory available to store the currentsub-routine.
5034 Two or more movements arecommanded in G110.
Two or more M or T codes were programmed in a G110 block.
5035 No feed rate of B axis. No feedrate specified for axis motion
5036 No R point data in cannedcycle.
No retract point specified for G81, G83, or G84 cycle.
5037 No cutting depth in G83. Cutting depth Q is not defined in a G83 cycle or is defined as “0"(zero).
5038 Six or more M codes of startmovement.
Six or more M codes of start movement are programmed for theend-working turret.
5039 Non-registration program. M81 commanded when G101 sub-routine not defined.M82 commanded when G102 sub-routine not defined.M83 commanded when G103 sub-routine not defined.
5040 Cannot execute B axis.
5041 Cannot command G110simultaneously.
A G101, G102, or G103 sub-routine is active when the controlreads a G110 command. Sub-routine must complete executionbefore G110 command can be executed.
CNC ALARMS
ALARMNUMBER
ALARMMESSAGE
ALARMDESCRIPTION
1805 Lower Axis Overtravel Overtravel condition on the lower axis (Y).
1808 Ram Turret M or T CodeError.
Illegal M or T code commanded within a G101, G102, G103 sub-routine.
1810 Y must be w/G101, 102, 103,110
Y data word must be programmed within a G101, G102, G103sub-routine or in a G110 “one-shot” command block
13-18 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 13-19
- NOTES -
13-20 M-320A
CHAPTER 14 - THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION
- NOTE -This chapter applies only to CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® CNC Lathes.
INTRODUCTION- CAUTION -
The actual thermal compensation function is performed by macro programO9027, which uses macro variables 142, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 527, 528, 529,530, and 531. DO NOT alter these macro variables or use them for any othermacro programs.
When thermal compensation is required, it must be activated BEFORE ToolNose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is activated. DO NOT activate ther-mal compensation after Tool Nose Radius Compensation has been activated.Undesirable axis motion may occur.
- NOTE -When general precision work is to be performed on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe, it is not necessary to program the M88 Command.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathes are designed with a thermal compensation fea-ture. This feature allows the programmer to command the CNC control, through the part pro-gram, to compensate for thermal growth as the machine tool warms up. Thermal compensationcannot be commanded while the CNC control is in Manual Data Input mode.
The programmer commands the CNC control to initiate thermal compensation through the useof the M88 command, which can be programmed as many times as needed in the part program.Each time the control reads the M88 command, compensation is performed according to theM88 command line.
The M88 command line may consist of only the M88 command or the M88 command withoptional parameters. When M88 is programmed without optional parameters, predefined defaultvalues will be in effect. Refer to “Programming the Compensation Feature”, on the next page, forinformation on the optional parameters and default values.
When executing programs with short cycle times, it may be sufficient to program the M88command once in the part program. In this case, the M88 command line is programmed on theline immediately following the program number.
When executing programs with longer cycle times, it may be desirable to program more thanone M88 command in the part program. In this case, the M88 command is programmed at thebeginning of each finishing tool operation.
M-320A 14-1
PROGRAMMING THE COMPENSATION FEATURE
COMMAND STRUCTUREThermal compensation is activated using the following command:
M88 M<n> R<n>
M88 Activates the compensation function.
M<n> (Optional parameter) indicates how often thermal compensation is to takeplace. <n> can be any whole number ≥ “2.”. The decimal point MUST beprogrammed.
If the M word is omitted, the CNC control assumes “1.”.
R1. (Optional parameter) indicates that the control is operating in radius mode.The decimal point MUST be programmed.
Diameter mode is the default mode. Omit the R word when the control isoperating in diameter mode.
EXAMPLESExample #1:
O1234 ; Program Number
M88 ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur everytime the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation is per-formed in diameter mode.
Example #2:
O1234 ; Program Number
M88 M2. ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur everysecond time the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation isperformed in diameter mode.
Example #3:
O1234 ; Program Number
M88 M3. R1. ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur everythird time the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation isperformed in radius mode.
Revised: September 28, 199914-2 M-320A
OPERATOR INFORMATION
PART PROGRAM INTERRUPTIONThe control Reset key and Emergency Stop push button have no effect on the M88 compen-
sation feature. Part program execution is resumed in the normal manner.
LIMIT VALUESThere are two limit values established in the CNC control that relate to the thermal compensa-
tion feature:
Limit value #1 sets a non-critical limit which, when exceeded by the calculated compensationvalue, causes a minimum compensation to take place. This minimum compensation will continueto occur until the calculated compensation value does not exceed limit value #1. Once the calcu-lated compensation value becomes ≤ limit value #1, full compensation will occur.
Limit value #2 sets a critical limit which, when exceeded by the calculated compensationvalue, forces an alarm condition and causes an alarm message to be displayed on the controldisplay screen. No compensation will be performed and part program execution will stop. Referalso to “Alarm Message”, below.
ALARM MESSAGEThe compensation feature uses the following alarm message to alert the machine operator
that one of two alarm conditions has occurred:
504 X COMPENSATION SYS. FAIL
The possible alarm conditions are:
1. The compensation hardware has malfunctioned.
2. The required correction value that was calculated by the CNC control exceeds a prede-fined critical limit (limit value #2). Refer also to “Limit Values”, above.
If one of these alarm conditions occurs, no compensation will be performed and the controlwill go into an alarm condition. Part program execution will stop. Pressing the control Reset pushbutton will clear the alarm message; however, the alarm will continue to occur each time theCNC control reads the M88 command line until the problem causing the alarm is corrected.Refer also to “Enabling Machine Operation”, below.
- NOTE -To correct this alarm condition, it will be necessary to contact the Hardinge ServiceDepartment.
Enabling Machine OperationMachine operation is possible after this alarm condition has occurred by removing the M88
command line from the part program. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 Lathe Operator’s Manual(M-321) for information on editing part programs. However, be aware that thermal compensationwill not be active and the desired level of accuracy may not be achieved.
M-320A 14-3
- NOTES -
14-4 M-320A
CHAPTER 15 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option](Hydraulic Axis Drive)
- NOTE -Refer to Chapter 16 for information on the optional ball screw driven sub-spindle.
INTRODUCTIONThe sub-spindle allows the workpiece to be machined at both ends without stopping the ma-
chine to end-for-end the workpiece. This reduces cycle time by reducing or eliminating handlingof the workpiece by the machine operator.
Drilling, boring, turning, and facing operations can be performed on a workpiece which ischucked in the sub-spindle. Depending on the machining sequence which is selected, the firstend of the workpiece is machined in either the main spindle or sub-spindle. The workpiece isthen transferred to the other spindle to complete machining of the second end. The sub-spindletravel specifications are shown in Figure 15.1 . Refer to Appendix One for more complete infor-mation on machine travel specifications.
TRAVEL SPECIFICATIONSTravel Specification Notes:
1. Dimensions are shown as inches [millimeters].
2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
3. Full travel is 11.500 [292.10 mm].
TI2708
CL
13.125 [333.38]Fixed Home Position
1.625 [41.28]Forward Position
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
4.75[120.7]
Figure 15.1 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications
M-320A 15-1
SUB-SPINDLE G CODESMost of the G codes are programmed in the same manner, regardless of whether the work-
piece is in the main spindle or the sub-spindle. However, there are G codes that deserve extraattention to be sure the proper G code is used.
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02/G03)
Circular Interpolation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manner as Circu-lar Interpolation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
G02 is a clockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed of themachine.
G03 is a counterclockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward thebed of the machine.
Refer to Chapter 3 for complete information on Circular Interpolation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41/G42)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same man-ner as Tool Nose Radius Compensation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
G41 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool.
G42 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool.
Refer to Chapter 2 for complete information on Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
TI2753
G42 G41
G03 G02
Main Spindle Z0 Sub-Spindle Z0
-Z Inside Part +Z Inside Part-Z Move forClearance
+Z Move forClearance
Tool Quadrant Q3 Tool Quadrant Q4
Figure 15.2 - Programming Circular Interpolation andTool Nose Radius Compensation
15-2 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE M CODESThe following M codes are used only in conjunction with sub-spindle operation.
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -Be sure the machine tool is equipped with “matched” collets when the use ofthe M07 command is required.
When using a bar feed with a machine equipped with an optional sub-spindle,feeding the bar while running the two spindles in synchronization is NOTrecommended.
- NOTE -M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the workholding device ofthe sub-spindle to match the main spindle. This allows the transfer of non-symmetrical partsbetween the main spindle and the sub-spindle. M07 is programmed in a block by itself. Thesub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit. Refer to Figures 15.3 and 15.4 .
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -When using a bar feed with a machine equipped with an optional sub-spindle,feeding the bar while running the two spindles in synchronization is NOTrecommended.
M32 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the sub-spindle to match the mainspindle. This mode is only used for part transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.The sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit.
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant)M33 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the forward direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute (IPM) or Inch per Revolution (IPR) programming is allowed. Thesub-spindle is rotating in the forward direction when rotating clockwise, as viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M34,M35, or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 15.3 . Refer toM03, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle forward command.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant)M34 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute (IPM) or Inch per Revolution (IPR) programming is allowed. Thesub-spindle is rotating in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise, as viewed fromthe sub-spindle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30,M33, M35, or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 15.4. Referto M04, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle reverse command.
M35 Sub-Spindle StopM35 commands the sub-spindle to stop. M35 remains active until canceled by M07, M32,
M33, or M34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02,M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop. Refer to M05, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle stop com-mand.
M-320A 15-3
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM46 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply to turn ON.
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM47 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply to turn OFF.
M56 Sub-Spindle OpenM56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to open, releasing the workpiece. M56 remains
active until canceled by M57. Refer to M21 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.
M57 Sub-Spindle CloseM57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to close, gripping the workpiece. M57 remains
active until canceled by M56. Refer to M22 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.
M69 External Chucking ModeM69 commands the control to use the sub-spin-
dle collet closer with external gripping style work-holding devices. External chucking is activatedthrough Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe op-erator’s manual (M-321) for information on switch-ing chucking modes.
M70 Internal Chucking ModeM70 commands the control to use the sub-spin-
dle collet closer with internal gripping style work-holding devices. Internal chucking is activatedthrough Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe op-erator’s manual (M-321) for information on switch-ing chucking modes.
M84 Sub-Spindle ForwardM84 commands the sub-spindle carriage to
move toward the main spindle at a rapid traverserate of 300 in/min. [7620 mm/min.] until it trips arapid-to-feed switch. At that point, the sub-spindlegoes to a feedrate that is preset by the machineoperator.
M85 Sub-Spindle HomeM85 commands the sub-spindle carriage to
move away from the main spindle at a rapid tr-averse rate of 300 in/min. [7620 mm/min.] andstop at the fixed home position.
Rotational Direction: Right-hand Drilling.O.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.I.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
Spindle Command:M33 - Sub-Spindle Forward
TI2754
Figure 15.3 - Sub-Spindle ForwardRotation
Rotational Direction: Left-hand Drilling.O.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.I.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
Spindle Command:M34 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
TI2755
Figure 15.4 - Sub-Spindle ReverseRotation
15-4 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT OFFSET- CAUTION -
The work shift file contains an X and a Z register. The X axis register shouldbe set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis work shift register MUST be a NEGATIVEnumber.
The work shift offset MUST be modified whenever the workpiece is trans-ferred between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The work shift offset sets the face of the workpiece to Z0 (zero) and is programmed as aNEGATIVE number regardless of whether the workpiece is in the sub-spindle or the main spin-dle.
Program a G10 line at the beginning of each tool operation to be sure the proper work shift isactive for that particular operation.
TI2756
3.125
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-3.125 ;
Main Spindle Z0
Figure 15.5 - Sample Main Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
TI2757Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-10.625
10.625
Safe IndexZ-4.5
Sub-Spindle Z0
Figure 15.6 - Sample Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
M-320A 15-5
PROGRAMMING AXIS MOTION
U/X AXIS MOTION
Programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during sub-spindle operationis the same as programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during mainspindle operation.
W/Z AXIS MOTION
- WARNING -Z Axis motion required to clear the workpiece during sub-spindle operation isin the opposite direction of that required to clear the workpiece during mainspindle operation.
The control assumes all numerical data to be positive (+) unless a minus (-)sign is programmed. When required, be sure the minus (-) sign is pro-grammed.
When the workpiece is in the main spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of theworkpiece is to the right of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are positive (+)W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are positive (+). Therefore, to clearthe workpiece on the Z axis, program either a positive (+) W or positive (+) Z move along withwhatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
When the workpiece is in the sub-spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of theworkpiece is to the left of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are negative (-)W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are negative (-). Therefore, to clearthe workpiece on the Z axis, program either a negative (-) W or negative (-) Z move along withwhatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
15-6 M-320A
TOOL OFFSETSTool Offsets are established and activated for sub-spindle operations in the same manner as
they are for main spindle operations. Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, forcomplete information on tool offsets.
- CAUTION -Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can onlybe mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS
A point of concern when programming for sub-spindle operations is the tool nose orientationcode. (Refer to Figure 15.2) Be sure the proper orientation codes are entered in the tool offsetregisters. Refer also to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4.
TOOL WEAR OFFSETS
Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for information on entering Tool WearOffsets into the control.
X Axis Tool Wear OffsetsWhen the X axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diame-ter will increase.
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closerto the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter willdecrease.
Z Axis Tool Wear OffsetsWhen the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the face of the main spindle (closer to the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axiscoordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will increase during main spindle operations anddecrease during sub-spindle operations.
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closerto the face of the main spindle (further from the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axiscoordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will decrease during main spindle operations andincrease during sub-spindle operations.
M-320A 15-7
SUB-SPINDLE SAFE START AND SAFE END SUBPROGRAMS- NOTE -
Use of the Hardinge Safe Start and Safe End subprograms is strongly recom-mended.
- WARNING -NEVER use subprograms O1, O2, or O999 when machining on the sub-spin-dle. Personal injury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool mayresult.
NEVER use subprograms O3, O4, or O998 when machining on the main spin-dle. Personal injury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool mayresult.
During sub-spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with positive (+) Zmoves and clears the workpiece with negative (-) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machininga workpiece in the main spindle.
Three Safe Start and Safe End subprograms have been developed specifically for use whenmachining on the sub-spindle. These sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End subprograms areNOT to be used when machining on the main spindle.
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Safe Start and Safe End subprograms to be usedwhen machining on the main spindle.
The sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O3 ; SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAMN1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius
Compensation, RPM Limit,IPM Feed.
N2 M98 P998 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram.N3 M99 ; Return to calling program.
O4 ; I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAMN1 G00 G97 G98 Z-.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, IPM Feed, Z Pullback.N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation.N3 M98 P998 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram.N4 M99 ; Return to calling program.
O998 ; SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAMN1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station.N2 X12.5 Z-___ ; X and Z Axis Safe Index Position.N3 M99 ; Return to calling program.
15-8 M-320A
SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Safe Start and Safe End subprograms O3, O4, and O998 should be loaded permanently intothe memory of the control. They are designed for machine safety and to help simplify program-ming. Subprogram O998 is used to deactivate the tool offset and command the safe indexcoordinates.
O3 SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P3 is used at the start of every sub-spindle operation and at the end ofevery O.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that theturret is in a safe position before indexing.
O4 I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P4 is used at the end ofevery I.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures thatthe proper G codes are active and that the turret isin a safe position before indexing.
O998 SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM
- CAUTION -The Z axis coordinate defined insubprogram O998 MUST be pro-grammed as a negative number.
This subprogram deactivates the tool offset andsupplies the coordinates for the safe index posi-tion. The Z axis value is set by the machine op-erator. It should be equal to the Z axis distancefrom the turret top plate reference point to the tipof the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer to Figure15.7 .
This subprogram is called by subprograms O3and O4.
METRIC MODE
When programming in metric units, the following changes must be made to subprograms O4and O998.
Line N1 in subprogram O4: Z axis value must be in millimeters.
Line N2 in subprogram O998 : X and Z axis values must be in millimeters.
Subprogram O3 does not require changes.
TI2766
SAFE INDEX = Z + 1" [25 mm]
Z
+X
+Z
Figure 15.7 - Z Axis Safe Index ValueCalculation for Sub-Spindle Operations
M-320A 15-9
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING FORMATS
RUNNING THE SUB-SPINDLE ALONE
N__ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-____ ; Establish Work ShiftG97 S1000 M33 (or) M34 ; 1000 RPM and Sub-Spindle DirectionM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T____ ; Index to Station and Call Tool OffsetX____ Z-____ M8 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Coolant ON
If Using Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation(Non-Cutting Move Required)
Machine the Workpiece
G1 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece,Inch per Minute Feed Required
End of Operation
X____ (and/or) Z____ ; Move to clear the WorkpieceM98 P3 (or) M98 P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End SubprogramM01 ; Optional Stop
The sub-spindle has a 6000 rpm limit.
15-10 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SYNC WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE
N__ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-____ ; Establish Work ShiftG97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 ; 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction, Coolant ONM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T____ ; Index to Station and Call Tool OffsetX____ Z-____ M32 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Sync Sub-SpindleM07 ; Phase Sync Spindles [Optional Command]
If Using Constant Surface Speed
G50 S____ ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S____ ; Establish Constant Surface Feet [Meters] per Minute
If Using Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation(Non-Cutting Move Required)
Machine the Workpiece
G1 G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece, Inch per Rev Feed
End of Operation
X____ (and/or) Z____ ; Move to clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 (or) P2 (or) P3 (or) P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End SubprogramM35 ; Cancel Sync - Stop Sub-SpindleM01 ; Optional Stop
When running the sub-spindle in sync with the main spindle (M07 or M32):
Constant Surface Speed (G96) and Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) are allowed.
Forward rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M04 or M14 command to the main spindle.
Reverse rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M03 or M13 command to the main spindle.
The sub-spindle has a 6000 rpm limit.
M-320A 15-11
WORKPIECE TRANSFERThe following sample program segments in this section illustrate the proper format and se-
quence for programming workpiece transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.There are three basic types of workpiece transfers:
1. Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 15.8 through 15.10)
2. Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 15.11 through 15.13)
3. Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle (Figures 15.14 through 15.16)
Transferring the workpiece between the main spindle and the sub-spindle can be accom-plished by programming the workpiece transfer by using standard programming or by usingmacro program O9170, which is designed to simplify the transfer process.
The format of macro program O9170 will vary, depending on whether a bar job transfer or aslug jog transfer is to be performed.
Examples of each method will be shown in the following sections.
MACRO PROGRAM O9170
Block FormatInch Format: G65 P9170 S1 B2.4 X±2.4 F1.6
Metric Format: G65 P9170 S1 B3.3 X±3.3 F3.4
Where:
G65 = G Code for Macro Call
P9170 = Macro Program 9170 (Workpiece Transfer)
S = Type of Job TransferS1 = Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-SpindleS2 = Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-SpindleS3 = Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle
B = Bar Stock Diameter (Used only with S1 type transfers)
X = End Point of the Cut-off Operation (Used only with S1 type transfers)
F = Feedrate (per revolution) for the Cut-off Operation (Used only with S1type transfers)
- NOTE -Decimal point programming is not required with the S word.
15-12 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM MAIN SPINDLE TO SUB-SPINDLE
The following two sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence forprogramming bar job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. The first program seg-ment uses standard programming and the second program segment makes use of the O9170macro program. Refer to Figures 15.8 through 15.10 .
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Standard Programming)
N10 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.5 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Forward, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1010 ; Index to Station 10 and Select Tool Offset 10X1.2 Z-2. ; Tool Rapid to Start Point (Figure 15.8)G50 S3000 ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S250 ; Constant Surface Speed, 250 Surface Feet per MinuteM32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.9)M47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFG1 G99 X-0.04 F0.002 ; Feed Tool to X-.04 Diameter (Cut-off)G4 U0.1 ; Dwell .1 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOMEG0 X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 15.10)M98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 : Optional Stop
M-320A 15-13
TI2758
Figure 15.8 - Tool Positioned for Cut-Off Operation
TI2759
Figure 15.9 - Cut-Off Operation
TI2760
Figure 15.10 - Sub-Spindle Moved to Home Position
15-14 M-320A
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170)
N10 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.5 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Forward, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1010 ; Index to Station 10 and Select Tool Offset 10X1.2 Z-2. ; Tool Rapid to Start Point (Figure 15.8)G50 S3000 ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S250 ; Constant Surface Speed, 250 Surface Feet per MinuteG65 P9170 S1 B1. X-0.04 F0.002 ; Macro Call with Variables DefinedM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the data words programmed inthe G65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the values specified by these data words to selectand execute the commands listed below in the order that they are listed. When the last of thesecommands is executed, the control returns to the main program:
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S1 B1. X-0.04 F0.002 ;” block:
M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.9)M47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFG1 G99 X-0.04 F0.002 ; Feed Tool to X-.04 Diameter (Cut-off)G4 U0.1 : Dwell .1 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOMEG0 X1.16 Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 15.10)
M-320A 15-15
The following two sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence forprogramming slug job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. The first program seg-ment uses standard programming and the second program segment makes use of the O9170macro program. Refer to Figures 15.11 through 15.13 .
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Standard Programming)
N80 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.5 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG97 S100 M3 ; Main Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.11)M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.12)M47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondM21 ; Main Spindle OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.13)G97 S100 M33 ; Sub-Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM1 ; Optional Stop
15-16 M-320A
TI2761
Figure 15.11 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle
TI2762
Figure 15.12 - Both Spindles Grip Workpiece
TI2763
Figure 15.13 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle Home)
M-320A 15-17
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170)
N10 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.5 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG97 S100 M3 ; Main Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1G65 P9170 S2 ; Macro Call with S Variable DefinedG97 S100 M33 ; Sub-Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the S word programmed in theG65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the value specified by the S word to select and executethe commands listed below in the order they are listed. When the last of these commands isexecuted, the control returns to the main program.
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S2 ;” block:
M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.11)M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.12)M47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFG4 U0.5 : Dwell .5 SecondM21 ; Main Spindle OpenG4 U0.5 : Dwell .5 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.13)
15-18 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM SUB-SPINDLE TO MAIN SPINDLE
The following sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for pro-gramming transfers from the sub-spindle to the main spindle. Unlike main spindle to sub-spindletransfers, the only type of transfer which is used when transferring from the sub-spindle to themain spindle is slug job transfer. Refer to Figures 15.14 through 15.16.
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle(Using Standard Programming)
N80 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-11.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work ShiftG97 S100 M3 ; Main Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.14)M32 Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM21 ; Main Spindle Collet OpenM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM22 ; Main Spindle Close (Figure 15.15)G4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.16)M35 ; Sub-Spindle StopM1 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 15-19
TI2763
Figure 15.14 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle Home)
TI2762
Figure 15.15 - Both Spindles Grip Workpiece
TI2761
Figure 15.16 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle
15-20 M-320A
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle(Using Macro Program O9170)
N10 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-11.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work ShiftG97 S100 M3 ; Main Spindle 100 RPM ForwardM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3G65 P9170 S3 ; Macro Call with S Variable DefinedM1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the S word programmed in theG65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the value specified by the S word to select and executethe commands listed below in the order that they are listed. When the last of these commands isexecuted, the control returns to the main program.
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S3 ;” block:
M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.14)M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM21 ; Main Spindle Collet OpenM84 ; Sub-Spindle ForwardM22 ; Main Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.15)G4 U0.5 : Dwell .5 SecondM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenG4 U0.5 : Dwell .5 SecondM85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.16)M35 ; Sub-Spindle Stop
M-320A 15-21
SUB-SPINDLE SAMPLE PROGRAMThe following sample program is written for a workpiece to be machined from bar stock which
is 1-7/16 inches in diameter. The workpiece will be machined on the main spindle first; thentransferred to the sub-spindle to complete the machining operation.
BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Tool Stationand Offset
Main Spindle Work shift Z-2.75 -
Feed Bar Stock T1010
Rough Facing and Turning Operation T0101
Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0202
Workpiece Cut-off and Transfer T0404
Sub-Spindle Work shift Z-11.625 -
Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0808
Center Drill T0909
Drop Part
TI2764
Main SpindleWork Shift
Sub-Spindle Work Shift
-2.75 1.50
Main Spindle Face Sub-Spindle Face
-11.625
13.125Sub-Spindle Home Position
Figure 15.17 - Sample Program Work Shift Values
15-22 M-320A
SAMPLE PROGRAM
% Stop CodeO1112 ; Program NumberG20 ; Establish Inch ModeN10 (Feed Stock) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S100 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 100 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1010 ; Index to Station 10 and Select Tool Offset 10X0. Z0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG1 Z-2. F100. ; Position Stock StopM21 ; Main Spindle OpenG4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsZ0.02 F20. ; Move to Z.02G4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM22 ; Main Spindle CloseG4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM98 P2 ; Call I.D. Safe End Program O2M1 ; Optional Stop
TI1759
2.000
1.200
.100 R
1.125
1.250
1.400
45° x .05
20°
Figure 15.18 - Finished Workpiece for Sample Program
M-320A 15-23
N1 (Rough Face and Turn O.D.) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0101 ; Index to Station 1 and Select Tool Offset 1X1.5 Z0.005 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG50 S5000 ; Constant Surface Speed 5000 RPM LimitG96 S750 ; Constant Surface Speed, 750 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G99 X-0.06 F0.005 ; Rough Face the WorkpieceG98 X1.45 Z0.05 F100. ; Move to Clear the WorkpieceG90 G99 X1.3 Z-1.19 F0.008 ; G90 Turning Cycle - Single PassG1 G98 X1.025 F75. ; Position for Rough TurnG99 Z0.005 F0.007 ; Feed to Face of WorkpieceX1.135 Z-0.05 ; Rough Turn the 45 Degree AngleA180. ; Rough Turn the O.D.X1.26 Z-1.195 A160. ; Rough Turn the 20 Degree AngleX1.45 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
N2 (Finish R.015 Q3) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0202 ; Index to Station 2 and Select Tool Offset 2X0. Z0.2 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG50 S5000 ; Constant Surface Speed 5000 RPM LimitG96 S800 ; Constant Surface Speed, 800 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G42 X-0.03 Z0.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius CompensationG99 Z0. F0.003 ; Feed to Face of WorkpieceX1.125 ,C0.05 ; Face and Chamfer WorkpieceA180 ; Finish Turn the O.D.X1.25 Z-1.2 A160. ; Finish Turn the 20 Degree AngleX1.49 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
(Continued on Next Page)
15-24 M-320A
N4 (.125 Cut-off and Transfer) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0404 ; Index to Station 4 and Select Tool Offset 4X1.5 Z-2.135 M32 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sub-Spindle SyncG50 S3000 ; Constant Surface Speed 3000 RPM LimitG96 S220 ; Constant Surface Speed, 220 Surface Feet per MinuteG65 P9170 S1 B1.4375 X-0.05 F0.002 ; Macro Call for Bar Job TransferM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
N08 (Finish R.015 Q4) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-11.625 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M33 M8 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T0808 ; Index to Station 8 and Select Tool Offset 8X1.51 Z-0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sync Sub-Spindle (Reverse)G50 S3000 ; Constant Surface Speed 3000 RPM LimitG96 S800 ; Constant Surface Speed, 800 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G42 X1.5 Z0. F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius CompensationG99 X-0.03 F0.004 ; Finish Face the WorkpieceG41 ; Tool Nose Radius Compensation Axis ReversalX1.2 ; Feed to Arc StartG2 X1.4 Z0.1 R0.1 F0.002 ; Cut RadiusG1 Z0.8 F0.004 ; Finish Turn the O.D.X1.49 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P3 Call O.D. Safe End Program O3M1 ; Optional Stop
N09 (#4 Center Drill) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-11.625 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPMM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T0909 ; Index to Station 9 and Select Tool Offset 9X0. Z-0.1 S1600 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Spindle and Coolant ONG1 Z0.28 F8. ; Drill to DepthM98 P4 ; Call I.D. Safe End Program O4M1 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 15-25
N026 (Drop Workpiece) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-11.625 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTM35 ; Sub-Spindle StopM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3M26 ; Extend Parts CatcherM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM56 ; Sub-Spindle OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondsM47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM25 ; Retract Parts CatcherM1 ; Optional StopM30 ; End Program - Rewind% Stop Code
SUB-SPINDLE SAFETY INTERLOCKS1. When main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are both open, Cycle Start is
inhibited.
2. When main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are both closed, M84 (Sub-Spindle Forward) is an illegal M code and will not be executed.
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING RULES1. When operating the spindles in sync mode, DO NOT reverse spindle directions.
2. When it is necessary to program M07 (Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle), M32MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
3. For safety, the Work Shift Offset is programmed after each Operation Sequence number.
4. Be sure to call the correct Safe Start/End subprogram for the spindle being used. Referto “Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms”, Page 15-8.
5. Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only bemounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
6. Enter a 0 (zero) at the beginning of each sub-spindle operation sequence number todistinguish sub-spindle operation sequence numbers from main spindle sequence num-bers.
7. When the operator is running a bar job, the Repeat Mode push button will be activated.When an M30 command is read by the control, the program rewinds back to the begin-ning. If Repeat Mode is active when the program rewinds, the program will begin execut-ing again.
8. When using a bar feed and a new piece of bar stock is loaded in the bar feed, the faceof the bar stock should be flush with the face of the collet in the main spindle since thepart program begins with a feed stock operation.
15-26 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 15-27
- NOTES -
15-28 M-320A
CHAPTER 16 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option](Ball Screw Axis Drive)
- NOTE -Refer to Chapter 15 for information on the optional hydraulically driven sub-spindle.
INTRODUCTIONThe sub-spindle allows the workpiece to be machined at both ends without stopping the ma-
chine to end-for-end the workpiece. This reduces cycle time by reducing or eliminating handlingof the workpiece by the machine operator.
Drilling, boring, turning, and facing operations can be performed on a workpiece which ischucked in the sub-spindle. Depending on the machining sequence that is selected, the first endof the workpiece is machined in either the main spindle or sub-spindle. The workpiece is thentransferred to the other spindle to complete machining of the second end.
PROGRAMMING AXIS MOTION
X/U AXIS MOTION
Programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during sub-spindle operationis the same as programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during mainspindle operation.
Y/V AXIS MOTION
- NOTE -When Y axis motion is programmed by itself, the sub-spindle moves at the pro-grammed feedrate. When Y axis motion is programmed with X and/or Z axis mo-tion, the sub-spindle moves at a compensated feedrate to cause the sub-spindle tocomplete the move at the same time as the other axes.
The Y and V data words are used to command direction and distance when moving the ballscrew driven sub-spindle. The face of the sub-spindle is the sub-spindle reference point.
Y Data Word
The Y data word commands an absolute move referenced against the Z0 (zero) positionof the machine coordinate position. Positive Y coordinates are to the right of Z0 and negativeY coordinates are to the left of Z0. The Z0 position will be equal to the face of the mainspindle unless modified through the Work Shift offset. Refer to Chapter 4 for information onthe Work Shift offset.
V Data Word
The V data word commands an incremental move referenced against current position ofthe sub-spindle reference point. Positive incremental commands move the sub-spindle awayfrom the main spindle. Negative incremental commands move the sub-spindle toward themain spindle.
M-320A 16-1
Y AXIS POSITION VERIFICATION
- CAUTION -“G53 Y#5024" MUST be commanded before Y axis motion is commandedwhenever the Y axis drive has been turned OFF through the use of the M66command and turned back ON through the use of the M67 or M68 command.
The “G53 Y#5024" data block commands the control to verify the position of the Y axis. Referto the programming examples used in this chapter.
Z/W AXIS MOTION
- WARNING -Z Axis motion required to clear the workpiece during sub-spindle operation isin the opposite direction of that required to clear the workpiece during mainspindle operation.
The control assumes all numerical data to be positive (+) unless a minus (-)sign is programmed. When required, be sure the minus (-) sign is pro-grammed.
When the workpiece is in the main spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of theworkpiece is to the right of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are positive (+)W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are positive (+). Therefore, to clearthe workpiece on the Z axis, program either a positive (+) W or positive (+) Z move along withwhatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
When the workpiece is in the sub-spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of theworkpiece is to the left of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are negative (-)W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are negative (-). Therefore, to clearthe workpiece on the Z axis, program either a negative (-) W or negative (-) Z move along withwhatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
FEEDRATE
Sub-spindle feedrate is commanded by the F data word, with a maximum programmable fee-drate of 394 in/min [10,000 mm/min].
Refer to Chapter 1 for additional information on the F data word.
TRAVEL SPECIFICATIONSTwo different sub-spindle travel specifications are available on CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP
Super-Precision® lathes. The sub-spindle travel is established at the factory. The two configura-tions available are identified as:
1.600 Offset Sub-Spindle, refer to Figure 16.1 .
0.460 Offset Sub-Spindle, refer to Figure 16.2 .
16-2 M-320A
TIA2950
CL
17.000 [431.80]Axis Reference Position
Sub-Spindle
4.75[120.7]
17.080 [433.83]Software Limit
17.300 [439.42]Solid Stop
1.600 [40.64]Software Limit
1.450 [36.83]Solid Stop
NOTES:
1. Dimensions shown as inches [millimeters].
2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
3. Full travel between software limits is 15.480 [393.19 mm].
MainSpindle
Figure 16.1 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications(1.600 Offset Sub-Spindle)
TIA2950
CL
15.875 [403.23]Axis Reference Position
MainSpindle Sub-Spindle
4.75[120.7]
15.940 [404.88]Software Limit
16.180 [410.97]Solid Stop
0.460 [11.68]Software Limit
0.310 [7.87]Solid Stop
NOTES:
1. Dimensions shown as inches [millimeters].
2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
3. Full travel between software limits is 15.480 [393.19 mm].
Figure 16.2 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications(0.460 Offset Sub-Spindle)
M-320A 16-3
SUB-SPINDLE G CODESMost of the G codes are programmed in the same manner, regardless of whether the work-
piece is in the main spindle or the sub-spindle. However, there are G codes that deserve extraattention to be sure the proper G code is used. The following G codes are discussed simply toeliminate possible questions.
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02/G03)
Circular Interpolation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manner as Circu-lar Interpolation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
G02 is a clockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed of themachine.
G03 is a counterclockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward thebed of the machine.
Refer to Chapter 3 for complete information on Circular Interpolation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41/G42)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same man-ner as Tool Nose Radius Compensation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
G41 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool.
G42 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool.
Refer to Chapter 2 for complete information on Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
TI2753
G42 G41
G03 G02
Main Spindle Z0 Sub-Spindle Z0
-Z Inside Part +Z Inside Part-Z Move forClearance
+Z Move forClearance
Tool Quadrant Q3 Tool Quadrant Q4
Figure 16.3 - Programming Circular Interpolation andTool Nose Radius Compensation
16-4 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE M CODESThe following M codes are used only in conjunction with sub-spindle operation.
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -Be sure the machine tool is equipped with “matched” collets when the use ofthe M07 command is required.
When using a bar feed with a machine equipped with an optional sub-spindle,feeding the bar while running the two spindles in synchronization is NOTrecommended.
- NOTE -M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the workholding device ofthe sub-spindle to match the main spindle. This allows the transfer of non-symmetrical partsbetween the main spindle and the sub-spindle. M07 is programmed in a block by itself. Thesub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit. Refer to Figures 16.4 and 16.5 .
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -When using a bar feed with a machine equipped with an optional sub-spindle,feeding the bar while running the two spindles in synchronization is NOTrecommended.
M32 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the sub-spindle to match the mainspindle. This mode is only used for part transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.The sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit.
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant)M33 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the forward direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindleis rotating in the forward direction when rotating clockwise, as viewed from the sub-spindle endof the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M34, M35, or bypressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 16.4 . Refer to M03, inChapter 1, for the main spindle forward command.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant)M34 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindleis rotating in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise, as viewed from the sub-spin-dle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M33, M35,or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 16.5. Refer to M04, inChapter 1, for the main spindle reverse command.
M35 Sub-Spindle StopM35 commands the sub-spindle to stop. M35 remains active until canceled by M07, M32,
M33, or M34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02,M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop. Refer to M05, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle stop com-mand.
M-320A 16-5
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM46 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply
to turn ON.
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM47 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply
to turn OFF.
M56 Sub-Spindle OpenM56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to
open, releasing the workpiece. M56 remains activeuntil canceled by M57. Refer to M21 for the corre-sponding command for the main spindle.
M57 Sub-Spindle CloseM57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to
close, gripping the workpiece. M57 remains activeuntil canceled by M56. Refer to M22 for the corre-sponding command for the main spindle.
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFFM66 commands the sub-spindle servo drive
system to turn OFF. Drive OFF mode leaves thesub-spindle carriage free to move, although signifi-cant force is required to move it. This mode shouldbe activated before opening a collet when theworkpiece is held at both ends.
M66 is intended to be used during workpiecetransfers between the main and sub-spindleONLY. Refer to “Workpiece Transfer”, beginningon page 16-14, for recommended programmingstructures for workpiece transfer using the M66command.
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque Mode
- CAUTION -Be sure to observe the distance and speed limitations when commanding Yaxis motion with Low Torque mode active.
M67 commands the sub-spindle servo drive system to switch to Low Torque mode.
Low Torque mode is only intended for short compensation moves performed at low speedduring workpiece transfers. These compensation moves must not exceed 0.100" [2.5 mm] inlength or 10 in/min [254 mm/min] in speed. Perform all standard Y axis motion with NormalTorque mode active.
M67 is intended to be used during workpiece transfers between the main and sub-spindleONLY. Refer to “Workpiece Transfer”, beginning on page 16-14, for recommended programmingstructures for workpiece transfer using the M67 command.
Rotational Direction: Right-hand Drilling.O.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.I.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
Spindle Command:M33 - Sub-Spindle Forward
TI2754
Figure 16.4 - Sub-Spindle ForwardRotation
Rotational Direction: Left-hand Drilling.O.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.I.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
Spindle Command:M34 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
TI2755
Figure 16.5 - Sub-Spindle ReverseRotation
16-6 M-320A
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque ModeM68 commands the sub-spindle servo drive system to switch to Normal Torque mode. Normal
Torque mode applies full torque to the axis drive ball screw. Perform all standard Y axis motionwith Normal Torque mode active.
M68 is also activated at control power-up, by pressing the control Reset key on the ManualData Input keyboard, or when an M30 (End of Program) is read by the machine control.
M69 External Chucking ModeM69 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with external gripping style
workholding devices. External chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information onswitching chucking modes.
M70 Internal Chucking ModeM70 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with internal gripping style
workholding devices. Internal chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information onswitching chucking modes.
PART CATCHER OPERATIONWhen setting up the part catcher to retrieve parts from the sub-spindle, the machine operator
is instructed to position the sub-spindle 13.125 inches [333.38 mm] from the main spindle andadjust the part catcher to retrieve parts at that position.
When using the part catcher to retrieve parts from the sub-spindle during normal programexecution, it is the programmer’s responsibility to position the sub-spindle 13.125 from the faceof the main spindle to allow for proper retrieval of parts. The programmer can either cancel thework shift and send the sub-spindle to 13.125 [333.38] or program the appropriate coordinatevalue taking the current work shift value into consideration.
M-320A 16-7
SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT OFFSET- CAUTION -
The work shift file contains an X and a Z register. The X axis register shouldbe set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis work shift register MUST be a NEGATIVEnumber.
The work shift offset MUST be modified whenever the workpiece is trans-ferred between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The work shift offset sets the face of the workpiece to Z0 (zero) and is programmed as aNEGATIVE number regardless of whether the workpiece is in the sub-spindle or the main spin-dle.
Program a G10 line at the beginning of each tool operation to be sure the proper work shift isactive for that particular operation.
TI2756
3.125
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-3.125 ;
Main Spindle Z0
Figure 16.6 - Sample Main Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
TI2757Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-10.625
10.625
Safe IndexZ-4.5
Sub-Spindle Z0
Figure 16.7 - Sample Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
16-8 M-320A
TOOL OFFSETSTool Offsets are established and activated for sub-spindle operations in the same manner as
they are for main spindle operations. Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, forcomplete information on tool offsets.
- CAUTION -Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can onlybe mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS
A point of concern when programming for sub-spindle operations is the tool nose orientationcode. (Refer to Figure 16.3) Be sure the proper orientation codes are entered in the tool offsetregisters. Refer also to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4.
TOOL WEAR OFFSETS
Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for information on entering Tool WearOffsets into the control.
X Axis Tool Wear OffsetsWhen the X axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diame-ter will increase.
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closerto the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter willdecrease.
Z Axis Tool Wear OffsetsWhen the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the face of the main spindle (closer to the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axiscoordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will increase during main spindle operations anddecrease during sub-spindle operations.
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closerto the face of the main spindle (further from the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axiscoordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will decrease during main spindle operations andincrease during sub-spindle operations.
M-320A 16-9
SUB-SPINDLE SAFE START AND SAFE END SUBPROGRAMS- NOTE -
Use of the Hardinge Safe Start and Safe End subprograms is strongly recom-mended.
- WARNING -NEVER use subprograms O1, O2, or O999 when machining on the sub-spin-dle. Personal injury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool mayresult.
NEVER use subprograms O3, O4, or O998 when machining on the main spin-dle. Personal injury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool mayresult.
During sub-spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with positive (+) Zmoves and clears the workpiece with negative (-) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machininga workpiece in the main spindle.
Three Safe Start and Safe End subprograms have been developed specifically for use whenmachining on the sub-spindle. These sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End subprograms areNOT to be used when machining on the main spindle.
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Safe Start and Safe End subprograms to be usedwhen machining on the main spindle.
The sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O3 ; SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAMN1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius
Compensation and RPM Limit, Feed per Minute.N2 M98 P998 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram.N3 M99 ; Return to calling program.
O4 ; I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAMN1 G00 G97 G98 Z-.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, Feed per Minute,
Z Pullback.N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation.N3 M98 P998 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram.N4 M99 ; Return to calling program.
O998 ; SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAMN1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station.N2 X12.5 Z-___ ; X and Z Axis Safe Index Position.N3 M99 ; Return to calling program.
16-10 M-320A
SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Safe Start and Safe End subprograms O3, O4, and O998 should be loaded permanently intothe memory of the control. They are designed for machine safety and to help simplify program-ming. Subprogram O998 is used to deactivate the tool offset and command the safe indexcoordinates.
O3 SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P3 is used at the start of every sub-spindle operation and at the end ofevery O.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that theturret is in a safe position before indexing.
O4 I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P4 is used at the end ofevery I.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures thatthe proper G codes are active and that the turret isin a safe position before indexing.
O998 SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM
- CAUTION -The Z axis coordinate defined insubprogram O998 MUST be pro-grammed as a negative number.
This subprogram deactivates the tool offset andsupplies the coordinates for the safe index posi-tion. The Z axis value is set by the machine op-erator. It should be equal to the Z axis distancefrom the turret top plate reference point to the tipof the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer to Figure16.8 .
This subprogram is called by subprograms O3and O4.
METRIC MODE
When programming in metric units, the following changes must be made to subprograms O4and O998.
Line N1 in subprogram O4: Z axis value must be in millimeters.
Line N2 in subprogram O998 : X and Z axis values must be in millimeters.
Subprogram O3 does not require changes.
TI2766
SAFE INDEX = Z + 1" [25 mm]
Z
+X
+Z
Figure 16.8 - Z Axis Safe Index ValueCalculation for Sub-Spindle Operations
M-320A 16-11
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING FORMATS
RUNNING THE SUB-SPINDLE ALONE
N__ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-____ ; Establish Work ShiftG97 S1000 M33 (or) M34 ; 1000 RPM and Sub-Spindle DirectionM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T____ ; Index to Tool Station and Call Tool OffsetX____ Z-____ M8 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Coolant ON
If Using Constant Surface Speed
G50 S____ ; Establish RPM LimitG96 S___ ; Surface Feet (Meters) per Minute
If Using Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)
Machine the Workpiece
G1 G98 (or) G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece,Feed per Minute/Revolution
End of Operation
X____ (and/or) Z____ ; Move to clear the WorkpieceM98 P3 (or) M98 P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End SubprogramM01 ; Optional Stop
The sub-spindle has a 6000 rpm limit.
16-12 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SYNC WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE
N__ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-____ ; Establish Work ShiftG97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 ; 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction, Coolant ONM98 P1 (or) P3 ; Call Appropriate Safe Start Program (01 or O3)T____ ; Index to Tool Station and Call Tool OffsetX____ Z-____ M32 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Sync Sub-SpindleM07 ; Phase Sync Spindles [Optional Command]
If Using Constant Surface Speed
G50 S____ ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S____ ; Surface Feet [Meters] per Minute
If Using Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose RadiusCompensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)
Machine the Workpiece
G1 G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece, Inch per Rev Feed
End of Operation
X____ (and/or) Z____ ; Move to clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 (or) P2 (or) P3 (or) P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End SubprogramM35 ; Cancel Sync - Stop Sub-SpindleM01 ; Optional Stop
When running the sub-spindle in sync with the main spindle (M07 or M32):
Constant Surface Speed (G96) and Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) are allowed.
Forward rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M04 or M14 command to the main spindle.
Reverse rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M03 or M13 command to the main spindle.
The sub-spindle has a 6000 rpm limit.
M-320A 16-13
WORKPIECE TRANSFERThe sample program segments in this section illustrate the recommended formats and se-
quence for programming workpiece transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.There are three basic types of workpiece transfers:
1. Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 16.9 through 16.11)
2. Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 16.12 through 16.14)
3. Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle (Figures 16.15 through 16.17)
Examples of each type of part transfer will be shown in the following sections.
TRANSFERRING FROM MAIN SPINDLE TO SUB-SPINDLE
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-SpindleThe following sample program segments illustrate the recommended format and sequence for
programming bar job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 16.9through 16.11 .
COLLET STOCK STOP NOT INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET
N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.94 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG10 P0 Y-2.94 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece TransferG97 S2000 M14 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1212 ; Index to Station 12 and Select Tool Offset 12X1. Z-2.5 M32 ; Rapid to Start and Sync Sub-Spindle (Figure 16.9)G50 S4500 ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S700 ; Constant Surface Speed, 700 Surface Feet per MinuteM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONG0 Y-1. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to 1" over Part (Figure 16.10)M67 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque ModeG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet CloseG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM66 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFFM68 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque ModeG1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)G4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsG53 Y#5024 ; Y Axis Position VerificationG28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home PositionG0 X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 16.11)M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1M1 : Optional Stop
Revised: July 3, 199716-14 M-320A
COLLET STOCK STOP INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET
- NOTE -When a collet stock stop is used during workpiece transfer, Low Torque mode mustbe activated and the stock stop must be fed against the workpiece.
Test results indicate better part length accuracy WITHOUT the use of a collet stockstop.
N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.94 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG10 P0 Y-2.94 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece TransferG97 S2000 M14 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1212 ; Index to Station 12 and Select Tool Offset 12X1. Z-2.5 M32 ; Rapid to Start and Sync Sub-Spindle (Figure 16.9)G50 S4500 ; Establish Maximum RPM LimitG96 S700 ; Constant Surface Speed, 700 Surface Feet per MinuteM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONG0 Y-1. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to 1" over Part (Figure 16.10)M67 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque ModeG1 G98 V-.05 F10. ; Feed Stock Stop against WorkpieceG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet CloseG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM66 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFFM68 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque ModeG1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)G53 Y#5024 ; Y Axis Position VerificationG4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsG28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home PositionG0 X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 16.11)M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1M1 : Optional Stop
These formats activate Low Torque mode before the sub-spindle collet is closed. Stay in LowTorque mode while opening the main spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, programM66 and M68 to return the sub-spindle to Normal Torque mode BEFORE the rapid move toHome position.
Revised: July 3, 1997M-320A 16-15
TI2758
Figure 16.9 - Tool Positioned for Cut-off Operation
TI2759
Figure 16.10 - Cut-off Operation
TI2760
Figure 16.11 - Sub-Spindle Moved to Home Position
16-16 M-320A
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-SpindleThe following sample program segment illustrates the recommended format and sequence for
programming slug job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 16.12through 16.14 .
N84 (TRANSFER TO SUB) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.94 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG10 P0 Y-2.94 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece TransferG97 S2500 M14 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM ReverseM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONG0 Y-1. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to 1" over Part (Figure 16.13)M67 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque ModeG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet CloseG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM21 ; Main Spindle Collet OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondsM66 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFFM68 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque ModeG53 Y#5024 ; Y Axis Position VerificationG28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position (Figure 16.14)M1 ; Optional Stop
This format activates Low Torque mode before the sub-spindle collet is closed. Stay in LowTorque mode while opening the main spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, programM66 and M68 to return the sub-spindle to Normal Torque mode BEFORE the rapid move toHome position.
Revised: July 3, 1997M-320A 16-17
TI2761
Figure 16.12 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle
TI2762
Figure 16.13 - Both Spindles Grip Workpiece
TI2763
Figure 16.14 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle Home)
16-18 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM SUB-SPINDLE TO MAIN SPINDLE
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main SpindleThe following sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for pro-
gramming transfers from the sub-spindle to the main spindle. Unlike main spindle to sub-spindletransfers, the only type of transfer which is used when transferring from the sub-spindle to themain spindle is slug job transfer. Refer to Figures 16.15 through 16.17 .
N84 (TRANSFER TO MAIN) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-1.75 ; Main Spindle Work ShiftG10 P0 Y-1.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece TransferG97 S2500 M14 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM ReverseM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main SpindleM21 ; Main Spindle Collet OpenM36 ; Main Spindle Air Blast ONG0 Y-1. ; Rapid Part 1" into Main Spindle (Figure 16.16)M67 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque ModeG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM22 ; Main Spindle Collet CloseG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM37 ; Main Spindle Air Blast OFFM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondsM66 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFFM68 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque ModeG53 Y# 5024 ; Y Axis Position VerificationG28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position (Figure 16.17)M1 ; Optional Stop
This format activates Low Torque mode before the main spindle collet is closed. Stay in LowTorque mode while opening the sub-spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, programM66 and M68 to return the sub-spindle to Normal Torque mode BEFORE the rapid move toHome position.
Revised: July 3, 1997M-320A 16-19
TI2763
Figure 16.15 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle(Sub-Spindle Home)
TI2762
Figure 16.16 - Both Spindles Grip Workpiece
TI2761
Figure 16.17 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle
16-20 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SAMPLE PROGRAMThe following sample program is written for a workpiece to be machined from bar stock which
is 1-7/16 inches in diameter. The workpiece will be machined on the main spindle first; thentransferred to the sub-spindle to complete the machining operation.
BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
Tool Stationand Offset
Main Spindle Work Shift Z-2.75 -
Feed Bar Stock T1010
Rough Facing and Turning Operation T0101
Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0202
Workpiece Cut-off and Transfer T0404
Sub-Spindle Work Shift Z-15.500 -
Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0808
Center Drill T0909
Drop Part
TI2764
Main SpindleWork Shift
Sub-Spindle Work Shift
-2.750 1.500
Main Spindle Face Sub-Spindle Face
-15.500
17.000Sub-Spindle Home Position
Figure 16.18 - Sample Program Work Shift Values
M-320A 16-21
SAMPLE PROGRAM
% Stop CodeO1112 ; Program NumberG20 ; Establish Inch ModeN10 (Feed Stock) ; Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S100 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 100 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T1010 ; Index to Station 10 and Select Tool Offset 10X0. Z0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG1 Z-2. F100. ; Position Stock StopM21 ; Main Spindle OpenG4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsZ0.02 F20. ; Move to Z.02G4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM22 ; Main Spindle CloseG4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM98 P2 ; Call I.D. Safe End Program O2M1 ; Optional Stop
TI1759
2.000
1.200
.100 R
1.125
1.250
1.400
45° x .05
20°
Figure 16.19 - Finished Workpiece for Sample Program
16-22 M-320A
N1 (Rough Face and Turn O.D.) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0101 ; Index to Station 1 and Select Tool Offset 1X1.5 Z0.005 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG50 S5000 ; Constant Surface Speed 5000 RPM LimitG96 S750 ; Constant Surface Speed, 750 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G99 X-0.06 F0.005 ; Rough Face the WorkpieceG98 X1.45 Z0.05 F100. ; Move to Clear the WorkpieceG90 G99 X1.3 Z-1.19 F0.008 ; G90 Turning Cycle - Single PassG1 G98 X1.025 F75. ; Position for Rough TurnG99 Z0.005 F0.007 ; Feed to Face of WorkpieceX1.135 Z-0.05 ; Rough Turn the 45 Degree Angle,A0. ; Rough Turn the O.D.X1.26 Z-1.195 ,A20. ; Rough Turn the 20 Degree AngleX1.45 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
N2 (Finish R.015 Q3) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0202 ; Index to Station 2 and Select Tool Offset 2X0. Z0.2 ; Rapid Tool to Start PointG50 S5000 ; Constant Surface Speed 5000 RPM LimitG96 S800 ; Constant Surface Speed, 800 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G42 X-0.03 Z0.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius CompensationG99 Z0. F0.003 ; Feed to Face of WorkpieceX1.125 ,C0.05 ; Face and Chamfer Workpiece,A0 ; Finish Turn the O.D.X1.25 Z-1.2 ,A20. ; Finish Turn the 20 Degree AngleX1.49 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
(Continued on Next Page)
M-320A 16-23
N4 (.125 Cut-off and Transfer) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG10 P0 Y-2.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece TransferG97 S1000 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1T0404 ; Index to Station 4 and Select Tool Offset 4X1.5 Z-2.135 M32 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sub-Spindle Sync to MainG50 S3000 ; Constant Surface Speed 3000 RPM LimitG96 S220 ; Constant Surface Speed, 220 Surface Feet per MinuteM56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet OpenG0 Y-.5 ; Position Sub-Spindle to Grip WorkpieceM67 ; Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque ModeG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet ClosedG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsM66 ; Sub-Spindle Drive OFFM68 ; Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque ModeG1 G99 X-.02 F.002 ; Cut off WorkpieceG4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 SecondsG53 Y#5024 ; Y Axis Position VerificationG28 V0. ; Sub-Spindle Rapid Traverse to Home PositionG0 X1.5 ; Rapid Tool Clear of Bar StockM98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1M1 ; Optional Stop
N08 (Finish R.015 Q4) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-15.5 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ONM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T0808 ; Index to Station 8 and Select Tool Offset 8X1.51 Z-0.1 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Coolant ONG50 S3000 ; Constant Surface Speed 3000 RPM LimitG96 S800 ; Constant Surface Speed, 800 Surface Feet per MinuteG1 G42 X1.5 Z0. F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius CompensationG99 X-0.03 F0.004 ; Finish Face the WorkpieceG41 ; Tool Nose Radius Compensation Axis ReversalX1.2 ; Feed to Arc StartG2 X1.4 Z0.1 R0.1 F0.002 ; Cut RadiusG1 Z0.85 F0.004 ; Finish Turn the O.D.X1.49 ; Feed to Clear the WorkpieceM98 P3 Call O.D. Safe End Program O3M1 ; Optional Stop
Revised: July 3, 199716-24 M-320A
N09 (#4 Center Drill) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-15.5 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTG97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPMM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3T0909 ; Index to Station 9 and Select Tool Offset 9X0. Z-0.1 S1600 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Spindle and Coolant ONG1 G99 Z0.28 F.009 ; Drill to DepthM98 P4 ; Call I.D. Safe End Program O4M1 ; Optional Stop
N026 (Drop Workpiece) Sequence Number and Operator MessageG10 P0 Z-15.5 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFTM35 ; Sub-Spindle StopM98 P3 ; Call Safe Start Program O3M26 ; Extend Parts CatcherM46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM56 ; Sub-Spindle OpenG4 U0.5 ; Dwell .5 SecondsM47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM25 ; Retract Parts CatcherM1 ; Optional StopM30 ; End Program - Rewind% Stop Code
M-320A 16-25
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING RULES1. Cycle Start is inhibited when the main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are
both open.
2. When operating the spindles in sync mode, DO NOT reverse spindle directions.
3. When it is necessary to program M07 (Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle), M32MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
4. For safety, the Work Shift Offset is programmed after each Operation Sequence number.
5. Be sure to call the correct Safe Start/End subprogram for the spindle being used. Referto “Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms”, page 16-10.
6. Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only bemounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
7. Enter a 0 (zero) at the beginning of each sub-spindle operation sequence number todistinguish sub-spindle operation sequence numbers from main spindle sequence num-bers.
8. When the operator is running a bar job, the Repeat Mode push button will be activated.When an M30 command is read by the control, the program rewinds back to the begin-ning. If Repeat Mode is active when the program rewinds, the program will begin execut-ing again.
9. When using a bar feed and a new piece of bar stock is loaded in the bar feed, the faceof the bar stock should be flush with the face of the collet in the main spindle since thepart program begins with a feed stock operation.
16-26 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 16-27
- NOTES -
16-28 M-320A
APPENDIX ONE
TI3330
14.625 [371.48] Solid Stop
14.150 [359.41] Software Limit
0.250 [6.35] Software Limit
-0.690 [-17.53] Solid Stop
+X
+Z
13.192 [335.08] Solid Stop
12.632 [320.85] Software Limit
1.634 [41.50] Software Limit
0.970 [24.64] Solid Stop 1
1.330 [33.78] Solid Stop 2
Turret Top Plate
Notes:1. All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].2. All measurements for X are diameter values from the spindle centerline.3. All measurements for Z are from the face of the main spindle.4. Full programmable travel on the X axis is 10.998 [279.35], measured on the diameter.5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 13.900 [353.06].
Main Spindle
CL
1 All machines NOT equipped with optional sub-spindle.2 Sub-spindle machines ONLY.
14.000 [355.60] Axis Reference Position
12.500 [317.50] Axis Reference Position
Z0
Figure A1.1 - Turret Travel Specifications(CONQUEST® T42 and T42 Super-Precision® Machines)
M-320A A1-1
TI3330
24.625 [625.48] Solid Stop
24.150 [613.41] Software Limit
0.250 [6.35] Software Limit
-0.690 [-17.53] Solid Stop
+X
+Z13.192 [335.08] Solid Stop
12.632 [320.85] Software Limit
1.634 [41.50] Software Limit
0.970 [24.64] Solid Stop
Turret Top Plate
Notes:1. All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].2. All measurements for X are diameter values from the spindle centerline.3. All measurements for Z are from the face of the main spindle.4. Full programmable travel on the X axis is 10.998 [279.35], measured on the diameter.5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 23.900 [607.06].
Main Spindle
CL
12.500 [317.50] Axis Reference Position
24.000 [609.60] Axis Reference Position
Z0
Figure A1.2 - Turret Travel Specifications(CONQUEST® T42-L Machines)
A1-2 M-320A
0.375 [9.53]
0.375 [9.53]
0.625 [15.88]
1.500 [38.10]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7500 [19.050]0.633 [16.08]
1.990 [50.55]
M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
0.750 [19.05]
6.9675 [176.975]
0.7500 [19.050]
TI2693
3.250 [82.55](Tool StopDimension)
1.500 [38.10]
1.500 [38.10]
Figure A1.3 - 12 Station Turret Top Plate Dimensions(3/4" Tooling)
M-320A A1-3
0.375 [9.53]
0.375 [9.53]
0.625 [15.88]
1.500 [38.10]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7874 [20.000]0.633 [16.08]
1.990 [50.55]
M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
0.787 [20.00]
6.9675 [176.975]
0.7874 [20.000]
TI2693
3.671 [93.24](Tool StopDimension)
1.500 [38.10]
1.500 [38.10]
Figure A1.4 - 12 Station Turret Top Plate Dimensions(20mm Tooling)
A1-4 M-320A
0.375 [9.53]
0.375 [9.53]0.625 [15.88]
1.500 [38.10]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7500 [19.050]0.633 [16.08]
1.990 [50.55]
M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
0.750 [19.05]
6.9675 [176.975]
0.7500 [19.050]
TI2788
3.250 [82.55](Tool StopDimension)
1.500 [38.10]
1.500 [38.10]
Figure A1.5 - 10 Station Turret Top Plate Dimensions(3/4" Tooling)
M-320A A1-5
0.375 [9.53]
0.375 [9.53]0.625 [15.88]
1.500 [38.10]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7874 [20.000]0.633 [16.08]
1.990 [50.55]
M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
0.750 [19.05]
6.9675 [176.975]
0.7874 [20.000]
TI2788
3.671 [93.24](Tool StopDimension)
1.500 [38.10]
1.500 [38.10]
Figure A1.6 - 10 Station Turret Top Plate Dimensions(20mm Tooling)
A1-6 M-320A
TI2694
0.50[12.7]
† 17.50[444.5]
† 6.00[152.4]
4.75[120.7]
CL
‡
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
† Due to the fact that this value may vary slightly from machine tomachine, only approximate values are listed.
‡ This dimension is dependent upon the tailstock center used.
Figure A1.7 - Tailstock Travel Specifications(CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® Machines)
TI2694
0.50[12.7]
† 27.50[698.5]
† 6.00[152.4]
4.75[120.7]
CL
‡
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
† Due to the fact that this value may vary slightly from machine tomachine, only approximate values are listed.
‡ This dimension is dependent upon the tailstock center used.
Figure A1.8 - Tailstock Travel Specifications(CONQUEST T42-L Machines)
M-320A A1-7
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
TI2786
CL
1.625 [41.27]Forward Position
13.125 [333.38]Axis Reference Position
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
Figure A1.9 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Main Spindle Turret Tooling
(Hydraulic Axis Drive)
Main Spindle
Sub-Spindle
TI2787
CL
1.625 [41.27]Forward Position
13.125 [333.38]Axis Reference Position
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
5.00[127.0]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
Figure A1.10 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Sub-Spindle Turret Tooling
(Hydraulic Axis Drive)
A1-8 M-320A
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
TI2955
CL
1.600 [40.64]-Y Software Limit
17.080 [433.83]+Y Software Limit
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
Figure A1.11 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Main Spindle Turret Tooling
(1.60 Offset Ball Screw Axis Drive)
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
TI2956
CL
1.600 [40.64]-Y Software Limit
17.080 [433.83]+Y Software Limit
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
5.00[127.0]
Figure A1.12 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Sub-Spindle Turret Tooling
(1.60 Offset Ball Screw Axis Drive)
M-320A A1-9
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
TI2957
CL
0.460 [11.68]-Y Software Limit
15.940 [404.88]+Y Software Limit
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
Figure A1.13 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Main Spindle Turret Tooling
(0.46 Offset Ball Screw Axis Drive)
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
TI2958
CL
0.460 [11.68]-Y Software Limit
15.940 [404.88]+Y Software Limit
4.75[120.7]
13.90[353.1]
.43[10.9]
1.25[31.7]
.25[6.3]
.25[6.3]
4.50[114.3]
5.50[139.7]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
5.00[127.0]
Figure A1.14 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications withWork Envelope for Sub-Spindle Turret Tooling
(0.46 Offset Ball Screw Axis Drive)
A1-10 M-320A
17.500 [444.50]Axis Reference Position
2.250 [57.15]Software Limit
17.560 [446.02]Software Limit
MainSpindle
TIA2695
4.75[120.7]
CL
18.03 [457.96]Solid Stop
1.780 [45.21]Solid Stop
.125 [3.18]
3.91 [99.3]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
Figure A1.15 - End-Working Turret Travel Specifications
M-320A A1-11
0.25
1.250.50
4.75 (Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL5.31
0.43813.90 1
23.90 2
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit-Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
TI2544
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
Figure A1.16 - Work Envelope with 16C Collet
A1-12 M-320A
6.81 0.25
1.250.50
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
2.80
TI2545
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
11.60 1
21.60 2
Figure A1.17 - Work Envelope with 16C "S-16" MasterStep Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck
M-320A A1-13
7.14 0.25
1.25
0.50
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
3.125
TI2547
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
11.28 1
21.28 2
Figure A1.18 - Work Envelope with 16C HQC-42Quick Change Collet
A1-14 M-320A
9.72
0.25
1.25
0.50
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
‡
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
TI2546
†
† CHUCK DEPTH6" Chuck = 5.09"8" Chuck = 6.62"
‡ Z AXIS TRAVELCONQUEST® T42 & T42SP Machines:
6" Chuck = 9.31"8" Chuck = 7.75"
CONQUEST T42-L Machines:6" Chuck = 19.31"8" Chuck = 18.78"
Figure A1.19 - Work Envelope with 16CThru-Hole Jaw Chucks
Revised: January 7, 1999M-320A A1-15
0.25
1.250.57
4.75 (Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit-Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
TI2544
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
13.90 1
23.90 2
Figure A1.20 - Work Envelope with 20C Collet
A1-16 M-320A
6.78 0.25
1.25
0.57
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
2.80
TI2545
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
11.67 1
21.67 2
Figure A1.21 - Work Envelope with 20C "S-20" MasterStep Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck
M-320A A1-17
7.78 0.25
1.25
0.57
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
3.77
TI2547
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
10.70 1
20.70 2
Figure A1.22 - Work Envelope with 20C HQC-65Quick Change Collet
A1-18 M-320A
9.72
0.25
1.25
0.50
4.75(Reference)
Headwall
X AXIS TRAVEL
5.31
0.438
+X Software Limit
-X Software Limit
CL
+Z Software Limit
Z AXIS TRAVEL
TI2546
5.62
1 CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.2 CONQUEST T42-L machines.
8.85 1
18.85 2
Figure A1.23 - Work Envelope with 20CThru-Hole Jaw Chucks
M-320A A1-19
SPINDLE TORQUE / HORSEPOWER CURVES
Ten Horsepower Main Spindle MotorStandard Torque
0.00
5.00
10.00
15.00
20.00
25.00
30.00
35.00
40.00
45.00
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
Spi
ndle
Torq
ue,
(Ft-
Lbs)
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
Spi
ndle
Pow
er, (
HP
)
Spindle Torque
Spindle Power
Base Speed = 1250 rpmAll values are 30 minute ratings
TI3209
Ten Horsepower Main Spindle MotorHigh Torque Option
0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
Spi
ndle
Torq
ue,
(Ft-
Lbs)
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
10.00
11.00
12.00
Spi
ndle
Pow
er, (
HP
)
Spindle Torque
Spindle Power
Base Speed = 750 rpmAll values are 30 minute ratings
TI3210
A1-20 M-320A
Fifteen Horsepower Main Spindle MotorHigh Torque Option
0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
70.00
80.00
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
Spi
ndle
Torq
ue,
(Ft-
Lbs)
0.00
2.00
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00
16.00
Spi
ndle
Pow
er, (
HP
)
Spindle Torque
Spindle PowerBase Speed = 1100 rpm
All values are 30 minute ratings
TI3212
Fifteen Horsepower Main Spindle MotorHigh Speed Option
0.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
60.00
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
Spi
ndle
Torq
ue,
(Ft-
Lbs)
0.00
2.00
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00
16.00
Spi
ndle
Pow
er, (
HP
)
Spindle Torque
Spindle Power
Base Speed = 1500 rpmAll values are 30 minute ratings
TI3211
M-320A A1-21
Five Horsepower Sub-Spindle MotorStandard Torque
0.00
2.00
4.00
6.00
8.00
10.00
12.00
14.00
16.00
18.00
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
Spi
ndle
Torq
ue,
(Ft-
Lbs)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Spi
ndle
Pow
er, (
HP
)
Spindle Torque
Spindle PowerBase Speed = 1500 rpm
All values are 30 minute ratings
TI3213
A1-22 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A A1-23
- NOTES -
A1-24 M-320A
APPENDIX TWOG CODES
CODE GROUP DEFINITION
G00 1 Rapid Traverse Positioning ModeG01 1 Linear InterpolationG02 1 Clockwise Circular InterpolationG03 1 Counterclockwise Circular InterpolationG04 0 DwellG10 0 Offset Value SettingG17 16 X,C Work Plane Selection [Option]G18 16 X,Z Work Plane Selection [Option]G19 16 Z,C Work Plane Selection [Option]G20 6 Inch Data InputG21 6 Metric Data InputG22 9 Stored Stroke Limits ONG23 9 Stored Stroke Limits OFFG32 1 Threadcutting Routine (Constant Lead)G34 1 Threadcutting Routine (Variable Lead) [Option]G40 7 Cancel Tool Nose Radius CompensationG41 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Right)G42 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Left)G50 0 Maximum RPM Limit used with Constant Surface Speed (G96)G65 0 User Macro CallG70 0 Automatic Finishing CycleG71 0 Automatic Rough Turning CycleG72 0 Automatic Rough Facing CycleG73 0 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat CycleG74 0 Automatic Drilling CycleG76 0 Automatic Threading CycleG80 10 Cancel Face Machining CycleG81 10 Single Pass Face Drilling CycleG83 10 Peck Face Drilling CycleG84 10 Face Tapping CycleG90 1 Canned Turning CycleG92 1 Canned Threading CycleG94 1 Canned Facing CycleG96 2 Constant Surface SpeedG97 2 Direct RPM ProgrammingG98 5 Inches/mm per Minute FeedrateG99 5 Inches/mm per Revolution FeedrateG100 - End End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option]G101 - Start End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]G102 - Start End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #2 [Option]G103 - Start End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #3 [Option]G107 - Activate Cylindrical Interpolation [Option]G112 - Activate Polar Interpolation [Option]G113 - Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option]
M-320A A2-1
STANDARD M CODES
M00 Program StopM01 Optional StopM02 End of ProgramM03 Spindle ForwardM04 Spindle ReverseM05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFFM08 Coolant ONM09 Coolant OFFM13 Spindle Forward/Coolant ONM14 Spindle Reverse/Coolant ONM17 Headwall Coolant ONM18 Headwall Coolant OFFM21 Open Main ColletM22 Close Main ColletM28 External Chucking Mode (Main Collet Closer)M29 Internal Chucking Mode (Main Collet Closer)M30 End of ProgramM31 Program Rewind and RestartM42 No Corner Rounding - Exact StopM43 Corner RoundingM44 Main Turret Bi-Directional Index EnabledM45 Main Turret Bi-Directional Index DisabledM48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Speed OverridesM49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Speed OverridesM58 Enable Constant Surface SpeedM59 Disable Constant Surface SpeedM98 Subprogram CallM99 Subprogram End
A2-2 M-320A
OPTIONAL M CODES
AIR BLAST:M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ONM37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF
C-AXIS:M23 C-Axis EnabledM24 C-Axis Disabled
END-WORKING TURRET:M60 Synchronization CodeM78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate OverrideM79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate OverrideM81 Execute Sub-Routine #1M82 Execute Sub-Routine #2M83 Execute Sub-Routine #3
GUARD DOOR:M38 Guard Door OpenM39 Guard Door Closed
HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT:M10 Coolant ONM11 Coolant OFF
LIVE TOOLING:M51 Live Tooling ForwardM52 Live Tooling ReverseM53 Live Tooling Forward / Coolant ONM54 Live Tooling Reverse / Coolant ONM55 Live Tooling StopM71 Simultaneous Live Tooling/Main Spindle (Forward)M72 Simultaneous Live Tooling/Main Spindle (Reverse)
PART CATCHER:M25 Part Catcher RetractM26 Part Catcher Extend
ROBOT:M62 Robot Request No.1M63 Robot Request No.2
(Continued on next page)
M-320A A2-3
STEADY REST:M93 Steady Rest OpenM94 Steady Rest Closed
SUB-SPINDLE:M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main SpindleM32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main SpindleM33 Sub-Spindle Forward RPMM34 Sub-Spindle Reverse RPMM35 Sub-Spindle StopM46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ONM47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFFM56 Sub-Spindle Collet OpenM57 Sub-Spindle Collet CloseM66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF (Ball Screw Drive)M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque (Ball Screw Drive)M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque (Ball Screw Drive)M69 External Chucking ModeM70 Internal Chucking ModeM84 Sub-Spindle Forward (Hydraulic Drive)M85 Sub-Spindle Home (Hydraulic Drive)
THERMAL COMPENSATION:M88 Activate Thermal Compensation
TAILSTOCK:M84 Tailstock ForwardM85 Tailstock Home
A2-4 M-320A
PMC GENERATED ALARMS
Alarm AlarmNumber Message Cause(s)
1000 Hydraulic OVL (OL-1, OL-4) Hydraulic motor overload (OL-1) on contactor(MS1) tripped.
Hydraulic heat exchanger overload (OL-4) oncontactor (MS1) tripped. (On Super-Precision®
lathes only)
The control is put in an alarm condition andthe machine in Emergency Stop.
1001 Collet/Chuck P-SW Fault Collet Close/Open pressure switches arefaulty. Main spindle pressure switch inputs in-dicate same state for more than 3.5 seconds.The control is put in an alarm condition.
1002 Sub Spindle Chuck P-SW Fault Sub-spindle collet Close/Open pressureswitches are faulty. Sub-spindle pressureswitch inputs indicate same state for morethan 3.5 seconds. The control is put in analarm condition.
1003 Turret Unclamped Main turret top plate not properly seated. Tur-ret index time exceeds two seconds. Turretproximity switch is faulty. The control is put inan alarm condition.
Turret index has been interrupted by Reset orEmergency Stop.
To clear the fault:
1. Clear the Emergency Stop, if necessary.
2. Press and hold the Zero Return push but-ton.
3. Press the Turret 1 Index push button.
The turret will index to station #1 and seat.Alarm will clear.
1004 Main Spindle Brake Fault Spindle brake pressure switch input contra-dicts the state of the brake solenoid valve.(Spindle free lamp indicates status of brakesolenoid). The control is put in an alarm condi-tion.
1005 Tailstock Fault Tailstock overtraveled beyond the rapid-to-feed dog. The control is put in an alarm condi-tion.
1007 Barfeed Fault Bar Feed tube out of position. Hydraulic motorprotection relay trip condition. The control isput in an alarm condition.
M-320A A2-5
1008 Spindle Unit Fault Spindle drive/motor overload condition. Thecontrol is put in an alarm condition and themachine in Emergency Stop.
1009 Battery Level Low Low voltage condition on control memory bat-tery back-up. DO NOT POWER DOWN THEMACHINE!
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322) for instructions to re-place the battery.
1012 Coolant Pump Overload (OL-2) Coolant pump motor overload (OL-2) on con-tactor (MS2) tripped. The control is put in analarm condition and the machine in Emer-gency Stop.
1017 Main Air Pressure Low Low air pressure to machine.
The control is put in an alarm condition andthe machine in Emergency Stop.
1020 Chuck Open Spindle collet/chuck is open.
1022 End of Bar (Cycle Strt Inhb) End of bar condition exists. The control is putin an alarm condition.
1025 Tailstock Breakaway Switch Tailstock breakaway limit switch has beentripped. The control is put into an alarm condi-tion and the machine in Emergency Stop.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322) for information on re-setting the tailstock.
1027 Invalid M-code Programmed M word is programmed for an option not avail-able/enabled on the machine.
M word is not defined in the control.
M word format error.
1031 Tool Touch Probe LS Fault Tool touch probe Up/Down limit switches indi-cate same state (logic “0"). Fault is generatedif tool probe travel time exceeds 5.0 seconds.The control is put in an alarm condition.
1034 Collet Setup Wrong Stopped Illegal collet setup during a sub-spindle opera-tion. For example, both collets are open. Notallowed.
1040 Low Hydraulic Pressure Machine hydraulic pressure has dropped be-low 60 psig [4.1 bars].
The control is put in an alarm condition andthe machine in Emergency Stop.
A2-6 M-320A
1044 X Torque Limiter, Check Zero The X axis torque limiter has tripped. The con-trol is put into an alarm condition and the ma-chine in Emergency Stop.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322) for information on re-setting the torque limiter.
1045 Z Torque Limiter, Check Zero The Z axis torque limiter has tripped. The con-trol is put into an alarm condition and the ma-chine in Emergency Stop.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322) for information on re-setting the torque limiter.
1501 Move Tlstk into Clear Area Tailstock out of position. Move tailstock toeither the retract position or the fixed homeposition. Cycle Start is inhibited.
1502 Lube System Failure Lubrication system fault. The machine is putinto a reset condition. All axis motion stops,coolant and air blast are automatically turnedOFF.
Check and repair lubrication system.
1503 Tool Group Life End ! All of the tools in one or more tool groupshave reached the tool life specified in the ToolLife Management program and an M30 “Endof Program” has been read by the control.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe operator’smanual (M-321) for instructions on resettingthe tool group counter(s).
1504 Part Catcher Not At Home Part catcher is not in the retract position. Cy-cle Start and tailstock motion is inhibited untilthe part catcher is in the retract position.
1505 Illegal Use of Part Chute Illegal sequence of parts catcher M codes. Po-sition of parts catcher is checked before exe-cution of M25 or M26 command.
(Continued on next page)
M-320A A2-7
1802 Turret 2 Unclamped End-working turret top plate is not properlyseated. Turret index time exceeds two sec-onds. Turret proximity switch is faulty. Thecontrol is put in an alarm condition.
Turret index has been interrupted by Reset orEmergency Stop.
To clear the fault:
1. Clear the Emergency Stop, if necessary.
2. Press and hold the Zero Return push but-ton.
3. Press the Turret 2 Index push button.
The turret will index to station #1 and seat.Alarm will clear.
1803 Battery Low in Ram Turret Control Low voltage condition on control memory bat-tery back-up. DO NOT POWER DOWN THEMACHINE!
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322) for instructions to re-place the battery.
1804 General Alarm in Ram Trt Control General end-working turret control hardwarefailure.
1805 Lower Axis Overtravel Lower axis overtravel condition. The control isput in an alarm condition and the machine inEmergency Stop.
1806 TT Cover OFF Auto Inhibited Cover for tool touch probe is removed whilethe machine is in Automatic, Manual Data In-put, or Single mode. Machine must be in Jogmode when cover is removed.
1807 Live Tool Drive Failure General live tooling hardware failure.
1808 Ram Turret M or T Code Error Illegal M or T code programmed in a G101,G102, or G103 subroutine or a G110 programblock.
1809 Door Opened in Sync Mode Main guard door opened during a sub-spindle“sync” mode operation.
1810 Y Must Be W/G101,102,103,110 End-working turret motion must be pro-grammed within a G101, G102, G103 subrou-tine or with the G110 “one-shot command”.
1811 Verify Door Sw[s] Machine power-up message. Open and closethe main coolant guard door to perform theguard door switch verification and clear theverification alarm.
A2-8 M-320A
PMC GENERATED MESSAGES
MessageNumber Message Cause
2013 T_T Probe not at Home Pos. Tool touch probe is not in the home position.Cycle Start is inhibited until the probe is in thehome position.
2019 Guard Door Open Coolant guard door is open. Cycle Start is in-hibited until the guard door is closed.
2023 Lube Low Refill ! Low lubrication oil level. The Single Block indi-cator light begins blinking as a warning to theoperator. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 latheoperator’s manual (M-321) for instructions onrefilling the lubricator.
If the lubricator is not refilled within 25 min-utes, the Single Block indicator light turns ONand the control forces Single Block mode.
2026 Invalid T-code Programmed The T word exceeds the maximum number ofturret stations on the top plate.
T word format error.
2027 Invalid M-code Programmed M word is programmed for an option not avail-able/enabled on the machine.
M word is not defined in the control.
M word format error.
2029 “B” Code or Hardware Error B word orient angle is greater than 360 de-grees.
B word is programmed for an option not avail-able/enabled on the machine.
B word format error.
2031 Jog Mode Reqd To Open Collet For machines equipped with bar feed optionand option is turned ON, Jog mode must beselected before manually opening the collet.
2050 An Access Door is Open An interlocked access door is open. Cyclestart is inhibited until the door is closed.
2090 Super-Precision Measuring SystemFailure
General measuring system hardware failure.(Only on Super-Precision® lathes)
2091 Mist Collector Motor Overload Coolant mist collector overload has tripped.
2092 Chip Conveyor Motor Overload Coolant chip conveyor overload has tripped.
2112 Part Count Satisfied The part count specified has been completed.Part program execution is halted.
(Continued on next page)
M-320A A2-9
2501 Lube Fail,5 Min To Shutdown ! Lubrication system hardware failure. The op-erator has 5 minutes to move the tooling offthe workpiece.
Check lubrication system pressure switchesand lubrication lines. For more information, re-fer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-nance manual (M-322).
2502 Z Axis Overloaded Adj Feedrate The Z axis thrust is limited to 1,500 pounds[6,672 N]. This limit has been exceeded. Themachine is put into a feed hold condition.
Turn Feedrate 1 Override switch down by 10%and press Cycle Start. Repeat until messageclears. Adjust the feedrate in the part programby the percentage that was required to clearthe message.
2503 Y Axis Overloaded Adj Feedrate The Z axis thrust is limited to 1,500 pounds[6,672 N]. This limit has been exceeded. Themachine is put into a feed hold condition.
Turn Feedrate 1 Override switch down by 10%and press Cycle Start. Repeat until messageclears. Adjust the feedrate in the part programby the percentage that was required to clearthe message.
2611 New Tool Used on Part A tool in the currently active tool group hasreached the tool life specified in the Tool LifeManagement program. The next tool in the ac-tive tool group has been selected.
A2-10 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A A2-11
- NOTES -
A2-12 M-320A
“Performance Has Established Leadership for Hardinge ”®
Hardinge Inc.Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA
Phone: 607-734-2281 Fax: 607-734-8819www.hardinge.com
